Home

User Guide

1. 0 Control Panel Touch Screen and Numeric Keypad Document Feeder and Document Glass Used for scanning single or multiple documents The document glass can be used for scanning single bound custom size or damaged documents Paper Trays 1 and 2 These trays are standard on all models Trays 1 and 2 are fully adjustable and can be used for media sizes 5 5x8 5 to 11x17 A5 to A3 Paper Trays 3 and 4 These trays are high capacity paper trays Trays 3 and 4 are dedicated trays used for 8 5x11 or A4 size media Bypass Tray Used for non standard printing media Paper Tray 5 This is an optional high capacity paper tray It is a dedicated tray used for 8 5x11 or A4 long edge feed size media Optional kits are available to accommodate 11x17 A3 8 5x14 8 5x11 or A4 Short Edge Feed SEF media Tray 6 Inserter An optional paper tray for use with the High Volume Finisher It is used to insert pre printed sheets into copy sets It is not part of the printing process and cannot be used for imaging WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 11 Getting Started Services and Options Services and Options There are a number of services and options available for use with your device Many services are provided as standard and simply require enabling or configuring with additional third party hardware Optional functions and kits are also available and can be
2. Job Ee PostScript file to the printer over the internet You can send the job from SE your desktop or from a remote location To use the Job Submission option I 7 e Enter the file name of the job C rimaire ra requiring printing or use the 0 rg raar Browse option to locate the file e Program the printing options required e Select Submit Job to send the job to the printer over the internet WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 213 Internet Services Scan Scan The Scan option displays a list of all the Workflow Scanning templates that have been created using Internet ette Neme theseriplion Optional Services Daner t gn Hn Use the Scan options to create modify copy or delete Workflow Scanning templates For more information about the Scan options refer to Workflow Scanning Options on page 123 of Workflow Scanning 214 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Internet Services Address Book Address Book The device supports two types of address book e Internal A global address book provided by LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol services e Public An address book created from a list of names and addresses saved in a CSV file Comma Separated Values format The Address Book tab is used to setup XE ESE and manage a Public Address Book The file must be in a CSV Comma Separated Values format for the device to be able to
3. 0 NRERNET 5 a cag anaes L A AEE SNN EENE NNS SEIVEL PO e EE EE pers TE E 7 FOX 20 0 020 E E EEE G Sending Faxfrom the 0 EN UGS S Ue CORNING aeree E EE ENEE Sending Lei nne T Saving Jobs for T Reprinting Saved 00 20 00 0005000004 POG OUI pepe ce nese sens 0020 E 00 PIOC VIY rererere oe rs gece ea ton a dome pe a ewes Maintenance and Consumables 0 ccc cece ee ee ee ene e teen enneeees 22222 2028500200 00000000 asada esas cnah een NA ICID 00 OR the Device a x 6 NR 0 0 5 ASO RE BIS PATORMG HON ee 2 0 2002 0000000000 0000000000 00 RNANA aed wees seir DOCUMENTOON 202 222 00 0200 02200 5 His 5000 0 On the Print Driver 4222202024 2 0200042000 en renner onere nen On Internet s sodec eee Further Assistance 22202 0222204202 2012020029 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started Introduction Introduction Your new device is not simply a conventional copier it is a digital device capable of copying faxing printing and scanning dependent on your model and configuration There are two configurations available e WorkCentre Copier Printer A multi functional digital device capable of copying
4. 4 138 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning Creating Templates Creating Templates Templates can be created modified and deleted using the Internet Services option on your device Template operations can only be performed once your System Administrator has defined the repositories and the Default template This operation is performed within Internet Services To access Internet Services 1 Open the web browser from your Workstation 2 Inthe URL field enter http followed BESTS iT by the IP Address of the device For ou 0 Q002 3 example If the IP Address is T E disi 192 168 100 100 enter the following aa Internet Services e E T rs SS a http 192 168 100 100 3 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP Address of your device print a configuration report For instructions refer to Print Reports on page 245 of Machine and Job Status New Templates 1 To create a new template select the ngre Scan option and select Create New a Template Note A New Distribution Template General Information window is displayed 2 Enter the name that you want to appear as the template name on the device 3 Complete the Description and Owner fields if required 4 Select the Add Destination to Template options required gt Select from a P
5. gt Use Show Custom Text to customize the cover sheet with your own information e Select the Sender s Information to print e Use Show Sender s Information to print the sender s information on the cover sheet e Use Hide Sender s Information if you do not want the sender s information to print on the cover sheet gt Enter the details of the sender to include on the cover sheet Fax Number Organization Telephone Number E mail Address gt Use Cover Sheet Image to select an image or text to include on the cover sheet Select New to import an image to include or to create your own text e Use Preview Options to select the paper size for the cover sheet WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 113 Fax Fax from PC Options On this screen there are 5 fax transmission options that you may use to customize the transmission of your fax oF ol Confirmation Sheet Print a Confirmation Sheet Send Speed Super G3 33 6 Kbps Here you can choose to print a Confirmation Sheet that will confirm S F Resolution the success or failure of the transmission Fine Confirmation Sheet L Send Time S 2 S Send Now Select Print a Confirmation Sheet using the drop down menu O Send At 2 00 Send Speed Fax Dialing Options C Dialing Prefix C Credit Card select the transmission speed The options are Cd You can choose one of 3 transmission speeds Select Sen
6. 123 Advanced 0 src cc Seu sc Gon Hae eee eo emewew eam aaa bearoa ee neeeewneswcnsecesets 127 Layout e TU ar a 25 4nc pane 130 7 EAE A A E 132 JOPAS 000008 134 Creating NEMIDIGLeS 0 0 135 SCA tO 0350 T E 142 0 een 145 ee ere eee ee er eee eee ere eee ee ee Tere ere 147 150 Printing 6 DOCUMENT 6 6 een 152 Paper 0 e 002502 2030202220 022200200 2000000000 0050 153 Cele PAGES 00 467546 e45 seus E a pete peas EEA 159 Mage 0 dre aceee dure duandes 162 Layout VV et 62 sl ore 5 5 0 rare acto hare sonar sen ang opie pacar aan aie ee Oe a 163 0 166 PSG 222 30 30 0133 020 00 2002 0000002440 44540 167 OUTO gt 0 0000020822 0 EEE RR 170 11 EIO 0000000000 000000000 173 Advanced Settings 2 4440 2510 0200090 ddedusedewedes 177 Layout ee Oe aS 180 0020030000 0000 344080455 182 reis A 184 Save and Reprint Jobs ca cuniwdnuuneueieaaeagaedsurary eer eceeeageaans aneueds 185 Res s 0 gt gt 188 SOVING C400 00 0000 0000009000 189 Reprinting SOVEO JODS 192 Managing sile gt wees eae caw need eentaseds 194 KLS Ea o 7 7 T97 e E 00202 00200024 0000 202 0000000 E E eurnnanemarned 200 ID 00 00 00 02 apart gage ad fanaa Gaeph nae 992424909444 ed ph
7. Far Line IDe 5 Total impressions 205 911 Gina information Customer Supp Y 67 OL Coen Supplies Number 12345 Machine Serial EMM 0000505 Paper Tray Status information Pages Print Reports Machine Hardware Options Machine Software Vorsions BR HMHE Locating the Serial Number Press the Machine Status button on the control panel The Machine Information screen displays the serial number The serial number can also be found inside the front door WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 General Care and Troubleshooting 300 Version 2 0 Decem ber 2010 xe OX L P Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5 0 Safety and Regulations 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 302 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Safety and Regulations 303 Table of Contents Nonce and Rolo 10 ee ee ee Safety Labels and SY
8. In the URL field enter http followed BESTT irr by the IP Address of the device For a Dus de Oe example If the IP Address is Bi tga aier tava 192 168 100 100 enter the following into the URL field date a Ra http 192 168 100 100 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP Address of your device print a configuration report For instructions refer to Print Reports on page 245 of Machine and Job Status Select Print to access the Job Submission options Enter the file name of the job requiring saving or use the Browse option to locate the file Select the Job Type drop down menu and select Save Job for Reprint The Saved Job options are displayed e Select Save to store the job only or Save and Print to store and print the job e Job Name is used to enter a name for the job e Folder is used to select a location to store the job The Default Public Folder is available to all users other folders may have restricted access e Secure Saved Job is used to add a passcode to the job The job can only be accessed and printed using the passcode entered here e Program the Paper 2 Sided Printing Collate Orientation Output Destination and the finishing options as required Select Submit Job at the top of the page to send the job to the device over the internet The job is processed and sent to the device for saving or saving
9. Statue WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 217 Internet Services Support The Support option contains the name and telephone number of your System Administrator and the telephone numbers you should use for Customer Support and Supplies Help Help Select the Help button to display the Help screens The structure of the Help screens corresponds to the structure of the Internet Services options Use the menu on the left of the Help page to access descriptions and instructions about all the features and functions of Internet Services 218 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Internet Services Version 2 0 Decem ber 2010 xe OX Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 577 5 5790 Paper and Media 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 220 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Paper and Media 221 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 P
10. Dialing Characters are alphanumeric characters which have a specific fax function and can be 3 entered as part of the fax number 2 Sided Scanning is used to select whether your originals are 1 sided or 2 sided Original Type is used to define the original document as text text and photo or photo Resolution can be used to optimize the resolution settings 7 Press Start to scan the originals and process the Server Fax job Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed Note The Server Fax job enters the job list ready for sending 8 Select Job Status to view the job list and check the status of your job Dialing Options The dialing options enable you to enter the destination fax number or numbers Select the appropriate dialing option for your fax job To access the Dialing Options select Services Home and Server Fax Manual Dialing 1 Select the fax number field and enter the fax number required using the numeric keypad 2 If special characters are required use the Dialing Characters option to enter the number plus additional dialing characters Refer to mage Quality on page 1 for further information 3 Select Add to add the number to the Recipient list Enter additional numbers as required Original Type r Resolution Phoin A Toxt Standard 200 x 100 dpi The fax will be sent to all the numbers in the Recipient list WorkCentre 5735
11. In the URL field enter http followed n by the IP Address of the device For a example If the IP Address is ESE 192 168 100 100 enter the following into the URL field ds ae lanl alin http 192 168 100 100 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP Address of your device print a configuration report For instructions refer to Print Reports on page 245 of Machine and Job Status 2 Select Scan and select Mailboxes from the display options 3 Select the folder required If it is a private folder a password may be requested Enter the folder password and select OK A list of the folder contents is displayed If necessary use the Update View option to update the list of contents Modify Settings or Modify Folder is used to update the folder settings or delete the folder from the device Delete All is used to delete all the jobs from the folder 4 Select the file required The following options are available e Download is used to save a copy of the file to a specified location If Download is selected you will need to select Save and specify a file location e Reprint can be used to print the file on the device The job is sent to the device immediately and printed e Delete is used to permanently remove the file from the folder and from the device Select the option required from the drop down menu and select Go 144 WorkCe
12. Paper and Media SLtoraggde lt s 291 AAAA EOSTN 292 0000000400 2000 Troubleshooting ae eT 292 DEMONO TAE POWIUS 0 292 FAUR DE DOYS 0 2 ENEN EE EENET ES 294 POUL OOS E E eae 294 205 0 E E EEEE E AREE 206 00000000 000 220 IDS Le 221 0000002 2005200205 300 455510 300 RETOX SUPPO COMIC cto H A sect eeera cere 300 Locating the Serial Number 0 0 ccc ccc cece nen WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 287 General Care and Troubleshooting General Care General Care There are several consumables on the device that need replenishing or replacing such as paper staples and customer replaceable units To place an order for Xerox consumables please contact your local Xerox Representative giving your Company Name product number and the machine serial number For information about locating the serial number please refer to Machine Information on page 245 of Machine and Job Status Customer Replaceable Units There are 6 replaceable units on the device e Toner Cartridge R1 e Xerographic Module R2 e Fuser Module R3 e Waste Toner Bottle R4 e Ozone Filter R5 e Document Feeder Feed Roll R6 The device will display a message on the touch screen when any of the units need to be reordered This message is a warning that the unit is nearing the end of its life Only replace the unit
13. e Use only the power cord supplied with this device e Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet Do not use an extension cord If you do not know whether or not an outlet is grounded consult a qualified electrician e Do not place this device where people might step on or trip on the power cord e Do not place objects on the power cord WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 305 Safety and Regulations Operational Safety Information Laser Safety Information A CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous light exposure With specific regard to laser safety the device complies with performance standards for laser products set by government national and international agencies as a Class 1 laser product It does not emit hazardous light as the beam is totally enclosed during all phases of customer operation and maintenance Device Safety This device has been designed to provide operator access to safe areas only Operator access to hazardous areas is restricted using covers or guards which require a tool to enable removal Never remove the covers or guards that protect hazardous areas Device Safety Do These A WARNING Do not use aerosol cleaners Aerosol cleaners can be explosive or flammable when used on electromechanical equipment e Always follow all warnings and instructions that are marked on or supplied with the
14. 2 Open the document to be printed From your application select File gt Print and select the Xerox device from the list of printers displayed 3 To change the default printing properties click Properties The print driver has various tabs that contain options and properties gt Use the Paper Output tab to choose the type of media size and color and output choices such as 2 sided prints poe Paper Output Special Pages Image Options Layout Watermark Advanced 2 Sided Printing Job Type Normal Print 1 Sided Print gt The Special Pages tab allows you to add covers inserts and exceptions gt The Image Options tab enables you to adjust the image quality e The Layout Watermark tab has various options to add watermarks to pages change image orientation landscape or portrait and enable booklet and multi up printing e The Advanced tab contains various font document and printing options Choose the options required for your printing job and click OK to print the document 4 The print job will be sent to the device and will appear in the Active Jobs list To view the list at the device press the Job Status button on the control panel If your job is held in the list it requires additional resources or a user log in or passcode to print To identify the resources required select the job and select Resources Required Once the resources are available the job will print If a user log in or passcode
15. 232 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Paper and Media Media Types Media Types This section describes the different types of media which can be loaded in your device For further information about media types and specifications refer to www xerox com The Type can be selected from a drop down menu for the adjustable trays It is important to select the correct Type setting for the media loaded in each tray The device can detect different types of media as it travels through the paper path and will halt a job if a mismatch occurs The following table identifies the media types available a description of each type and the tray Loading Instructions Plain Recycled and Bond paper can be loaded in any tray Carbonless paper can also be used with this media type instructions for use are provided with the paper Before loading hole punched media make sure that any plugs the round pieces cut out of the paper to create the holes do not remain in the stack Fan the media to separate the individual sheets Trays 1 2 3 and 4 e Load paper face down with the holes on the left edge Tray 5 and Bypass Tray e Load paper face up with the holes on the right Bypass Tray only e Load paper backed transparencies face up with the adhesive side to the right Load transparencies which have a white strip along one edge with the strip to the right and on the underside of the transparencies Load transparencies on top of
16. Add Cc or Add Bcc from the drop down menu The E mail address is added to the recipient list Multiple recipients can be added to the Recipient list in this way Select Close to exit Enter the Message Reply To From and Subject details as required Select the required features for your fax job using the touch screen P Output Color is used to replicate the original colors or to change the output to black and white grayscale or color Note This feature may not be available on your device 2 Sided Scanning is used to select whether your originals are 1 sided or 2 sided Original Type is used to define the original document as text text and photo or photo Press Start to scan the originals and process the Internet Fax job Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed Note The Internet Fax job enters the job list ready for sending 10 Select Job Status to view the job list and check the status of your job New Recipient Use this option to enter details of all the recipients of the internet fax To enter the recipient details Select New Recipients Select To Cc or Bcc for the recipient using the drop down menu to the left of the entry box Using the keyboard enter the E mail address e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered e To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the X button e Use the
17. Batch Send The Batch Send feature allows several fax jobs to be sent to the same destination fax machine during one transmission This reduces the connection time and provides a reduced call connection charge Batch Send is enabled from Tools For more information about enabling the Batch Send feature refer to Batch Send on page 267 of Administration and Accounting Once Batch Send has been enabled it applies to all fax transmissions Once Batch Send has been enabled program your fax job settings as required To allow other fax jobs to be transmitted with your job add a delay to the transmission time For more information refer to Delay Send on page 85 Enter the destination fax number and select the Start button Your job is submitted to the job list ready for transmission When a new fax job is submitted that has the same destination as the held fax job a pop up message is displayed When the delayed time has elapsed all faxes to the same destination are linked together and transmitted All individual fax job settings are maintained except the communication speed which uses the speed of the first fax job for the remaining jobs Note If Batch Send is enabled and a delay send job is programmed any subsequent fax jobs programmed to send to the same destination will automatically be added to the batch and delayed until the scheduled time 2 Sided Scanning The 2 Sided Scanning option allows you to set whether 1 or 2 sides of your origin
18. Check that the touch screen is displaying the correct size for the paper in use Load fresh paper Repeated Check Tray messages Adjust the edge guides against the stack of paper in the tray on the touch screen and the If the edge guides were not set against the paper in the tray when Start paper is loaded in the tray was Selected delete the job in the job queue and begin again 296 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Problem Potential Solution Paper Curls Load the paper in the paper trays with the seam side of the paper up Load the paper in the Bypass Tray with the seam side down e Load non standard media in the Bypass Tray e Ifthe paper curls excessively flip the paper over in the applicable paper tray The Finisher does not stack the e Unload the finisher tray frequently output correctly e Do not remove stapled sets while the finisher is compiling e Check the paper tray guides are locked into position against the paper e When using large paper remove any output contained in the Stacker Tray e Load the paper in the paper trays with the seam side of the paper up Load the paper in the Bypass Tray with the seam side down e Load non standard media in the Bypass Tray e Ifthe paper curls excessively flip the paper over in the applicable paper tray e Check the correct paper size has been selected for the paper loaded in the tray The Finisher does n
19. Fax Fax Reports Various fax reports are available for printing on your device Select one of the following reports to print e Activity Report prints details of the last 50 fax transactions e Address Book Individuals Report prints details of all entries in the individual directory e Address Book Group Report prints details of all groups in the group directory e Options Report prints details of the fax card configuration e Pending Jobs Report prints information about jobs currently queued in the device memory and details of available memory Select Print Report to print the selected report Job Assembly This tab provides access to the Build Job feature for compiling jobs which have different originals or programing requirements within a job To access the Job Assembly options select Services Home and Fax Then select the Job Assembly tab Build Job Use this feature to build a job that requires different settings for each page or a segment of pages iil RLE E Di You can select the appropriate settings to be Some pages Some pages Various More than applied to individual pages or segments of a withtextand 2 Wag 0 0 r pez a pages completed job First split the originals into ao enone ele T sections for individual programing 1 Select Build Job on the Job Assembly tab 2 Switch on Build Job by selecting the On button and DEIS E select Save e Pte ant eqn tba evn bu er surre
20. The options are e Lighten Darken provides a manual control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images e Move the indicator down to darken the scanned image for light originals such as pencil images gt Move the indicator up to lighten the scanned image for dark originals such as halftones or originals with colored backgrounds e Sharpness provides manual control to adjust the sharpness of the scanned images e Move the indicator up to sharpen the scanned image e Move the indicator down to soften the scanned image Select Save to save your selections and exit Image Enhancement Select Image Enhancement to reduce background and adjust the image contrast The options are Image Enhancement e Background Suppression enhances originals that have colored backgrounds by reducing or eliminating the background from your original This option is useful when your original is on colored paper e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress unwanted background e Select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature off particularly when gt The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals e The original has a gray or colored border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 177 E mail Advanced Settings e Contrast controls t
21. correct sequence is selected i e Left to Right or Right to Left The output is blank e Ensure the originals are loaded either face up in the document feeder or face down on the document glass in the top right position WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 297 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Problem Potential Solution Streaks lines spots solid lines Clean the document glass and if using the document feeder also clean or dotted lines on the prints the Constant Velocity Transport glass the thin strip of glass to the left of the document glass especially near the plastic ramp on the glass Clean the white underside of the document feeder document cover Clean the document feeder roller Clean the halo guide Clean the Charge Scorotron and Transfer Corotron if available on your device Check the paper tray guides are against the paper stack Run the job from the document glass Check the quality of the original Use Edge Erase to remove lines from the edges of the document refer to Edge Erase on page 54 of Copy Use the Background Suppression feature refer to Background Suppression on page 51 of Copy Load fresh paper Do not use heavily embossed paper Image Loss When copying a document from a larger paper size to a smaller size use Auto to reduce the image onto the smaller size refer to Reduce Enlarge on page 44 of Copy Use reduction i e copy at 90 instead of 100 Use t
22. 228 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Paper and Media Tray 5 Tray 5 paper optional kits Weights from 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 56 lb Note For 80 gsm paper capacities are slightly lower than specified Media types Plain Bond and Recycled Punched Letterhead and Pre printed Heavyweight Rough Surface Tray 5 is an optional high capacity paper source When installed Tray 5 takes priority as the primary paper feeder This tray is a dedicated tray and as standard feeds A4 or 8 5x11 Long Edge Feed LEF media Optional kits are available to accommodate 11x17 A3 8 5x14 8 5x11 or A4 Short Edge Feed SEF media The following media can be loaded in Tray 5 Up to 4000 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper A4 or 8 5x11 LEF up to 2000 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb Tray 5 must not be used to feed labels transparencies envelopes or tabs The Bypass Tray can be used for these media types WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 229 Paper and Media Tray 5 Loading Tray 5 The media size and type requested must be loaded in the tray and the settings cannot be adjusted by the user Note Your device does not warn you if the wrong sized media is loaded A CAUTION A problem may occur if a tray is opened while it is being used to feed media Press the button to open the door Opening the door automatically lowers an elevator in the base of the tray Wait for the paper tray to lower
23. 261 261 OPON 2 02 22 0200000006 0 ESETA ehce Gace s eseseenacan sae eeaetewenes 261 SERVICE SCLUINGS 000020 000000000 00 203 0 263 JOD SMO 2 2020 ee ee E eer 264 Reduce Enlarge Presets 25 POX odes sede yee ene secre a a A E E 206 OPODAL EIVOR 0 271 AUO MAGE eee 22 2222220050 2050020002 0000 272 2 23 Network ee ont apnhars 2 dada 4545 ond Laat NENAS VESON KORANE ENGR EKN NS 273 OMIREOMING 22 20 0 eirin ir EEEE E EEE ERRES E 273 Ethernet Physical Media 0007111121 n nee teen eee e eee nee e ees 273 COZ 2 0 23 sens 0 ee ee A 23 CG 000 E E 274 aT DOU Rs ss 274 PCCOUMUING 0 220 000 E 2220020202 002200 0008 25 e 20 2000000 aes eeeeeeeaeeeceeaes 25 oo dee arene ee EE 275 Secun 00 24240505 281 On Demand Image 281 202 Image Quality Test Patterns lt e 283 User Interface Tests seed anne EOE T ade tee 282 Sesi cease mseoes Ganado se tanere essed 44086056 283 Network Connectivity 1 0 EEEN EEES ESETE 283 Image Quality Adjustment lt ees easatadeWewudsdedsdsdedeanseees 284 KeTOX CUSLOME SUPPO 0 26 2 EErEE 0 2 24
24. 3 Select the options required for the first segment of the 7 segmant anbe job Dele All Segments deletes the entire job 4 Load the first segment originals and press Start 5 Remove the first segment originals The Build Job screen displays the first segment in the list The following options can be applied e Delete Last Segment deletes the last segment scanned You can continue programing the Build Job e Delete All Segments deletes the current Build Job and returns you to the main Build Job screen Po i When al segments haw been scanned select End Bud Job io siari iranenisgon 90 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax 91 Select the options required for the second segment Load the second segment originals and press Start Repeat these steps until all segments of your job have been programmed and scanned After the last segment has been scanned select End Build Job to indicate you have finished scanning and the job can be processed and completed WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax SE kl Server Fax Server Fax If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features Refer to Log In Out on page 32 of Getting Started 1 To select the Server Fax service press the Services Home button 2 Select the Server Fax option When a service is selected on the device additional options
25. 5 a ae activities performed within Auditron Initialization Sy Audon Group Accounts e Partitioning means dividing the machine memory between User and General Accounts rat tt After entering the number of User Accounts required the number of General Accounts is automatically calculated If more User Accounts are created fewer General Accounts will be created The number of Group Accounts is fixed and is not affected by the partitioning e Reset All Counters selecting this button resets all the counters for all accounts to 0 All account and User Numbers remain intact When initializing the account there is no need to reset the counters as all counters are already set to 0 e Initialize Auditron once the Auditron has been partitioned it needs to be initialized 10 To change the number of User Accounts select the User Accounts numeric entry region and enter the new number on the numeric keypad Alternatively use the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the number of User Accounts The number of General Accounts changes in proportion 11 Once you have finished partitioning select Initialize Auditron You are asked to confirm the initialization twice A message at the top of the screen displays Please wait nitialising accounts Once initialization is complete the message changes to Initialization Complete 276 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Accounting
26. Document Loading 20 Document Management 133 Document Management Fields 139 Documentation 37 Double Sided 75 94 104 125 156 175 Draft Copy 64 Duplexing 46 75 94 104 125 156 175 Duplicate Filenames 133 322 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Index Background Suppression 1 Contrast 51 Image Erase 131 140 Image Options 81 97 105 127 140 162 177 Image Overwrite Setup 281 Image Quality ID Card 202 Lighten Darken 50 Original Type 50 Screen 51 Sharpness 50 Image Quality Problems 284 Image Quality Test Patterns 283 Image Settings 141 Image Shift 53 Impression Counters 247 Impressions Count 210 Individual Fax Number 79 Information 245 Information Pages 37 211 245 Inserts 57 159 Internet Fax 25 71 100 Internet Services 209 Address Book 215 Billing 210 Jobs 212 Print 213 Properties 216 Saved Jobs 212 Scan 214 Status 210 Interrupt Printing button 16 Invert Image 54 J Job Building 63 Job Deletion Setting 281 Job List 241 Job Log 141 Job Progress 244 Job Status 241 Job Type 153 Jobs 212 Active Jobs 212 Saved Jobs 212 Jobs List Active Jobs 241 Delete 244 Held Jobs 244 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 323 Index Faxing from Books 83 FCC Regulations 309 Feature Defaults Fax 266 Feeding Documents 20 File Format 108 132 182 File Name 132 182 File Size 107 129 140 179 File Storag
27. E mail Layout Adjustment Layout Adjustment The Layout Adjustment options allow you to manipulate the scanned image and enhance the appearance and style a orsintonenation S of your output To access the Layout Adjustment options 77 ey select Services Home and E mail Then select the Layout Adjustment tab Original Orientation Use to specify the orientation of the originals being scanned The orientation of the images on the originals must match the orientation selected The device uses this information to identify if the images require rotating to produce the required output e Portrait Originals the images on the originals are in a Original Orientation portrait orientation A graphical representation of the me ears image orientation is shown when the option is Tt a selected fe moe e Landscape Originals the images on the originals are in a landscape orientation A graphical representation of the image orientation is shown when the option is selected Select Save to save your selections and exit 180 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 E mail Layout Adjustment Original Size Original Size allows you to specify automatic size detection of the originals mixed size originals or the specific size of the image to be scanned The options are Auto Detect is the default setting and enables automatic size sensing The size detected is matched to a standard size paper Preset Scan Areas a
28. Enter the shift required by selecting a field or use the arrow K Y buttons T e The amount of shift is in 1 mm 0 1 increments upto MA 50 mm 2 0 When copying 2 sided there are two options 9 Image Shift e Adjust the margin of side two independently of side one gt Use Mirror Side 1 for side two to mirror the image shift set for side one if a binding margin is required Select Save to save your selections and exit WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 53 Copy Layout Adjustment Edge Erase Edge Erase enables you to specify how much of the image to erase around the edges of your document For example you can remove the marks caused by punched holes or staples in your original The options are e All Edges is used to erase an equal amount from all the edges Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount to be erased from 3 mm to 50 mm 0 1 to 2 0 or select the entry field and enter the amount required All marks or defects within the measurement set are deleted e Individual Edges enables an individual amount to be erased from each of the edges on both the firstand second sides Use the arrow buttons to adjust the EES amount to be erased from 3 mm to 50 mm 0 1 to anal ges 2 0 or select the appropriate entry field and enter the amount required E Edge Erase e Print to Edge is used to print to the edge of the output documents Note This option may reduc
29. Layout Watemark Advanced 2 Sided Printing E 1 Sided Print 5 Program the Saved Job options as required e Select Save to store the job only or Save and Print to store PA and print the job R Ose e Job Name is used to enter a name for the job or select Use 5 TaS i Document Name to use the filename of the document fRequred CS being submitted Tg e Folder is used to select a location to store the job The Default Public Folder is available to all users other folders 410 Dael may have restricted access a e Secure Saved Job is used to add a passcode to the job The job can only be accessed and printed by logging in to the machine or using the passcode entered here Cancel 6 Select OK to save the settings and exit the Saved Job options Program the print features required for the saved job 7 The Help option provides an explanation of all the options 8 Select OK to save the print settings 9 Select OK on the Print dialogue window to send the job The job is processed and sent to the device for saving or saving and printing depending on the selection 190 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Save and Reprint Jobs Saving a Job Using Internet Services The Print option within Internet Services can also be used to create a Saved Job The job file submitted must be a print ready file such as a PDF or PostScript file Open the web browser from your Workstation
30. Note Selecting a locked service while not logged in will cause the device to prompt you to enter your Auditron passcode 2 Enter your Auditron passcode using the numeric keypad and select Enter If the passcode is invalid the device allows a further 2 attempts to enter a correct passcode After 3 attempts further passcode entries are inhibited Contact the System or Auditron Administrator to ensure you have the correct passcode If the passcode is valid and you have been granted access to multiple General or Group accounts the Accounting screen is displayed 3 Use the Accounting screen to select the a General or Group account for the job and to view current copy counts for your User Account 4 Press the Services Home button and select the required copy or print service 5 When you have finished a session press the Log In Out button again or select the User Details area and select Log Out from the drop down menu This option is also used to change the current General or Group Account without logging out You can also view the counts for the job using the View Counts option 6 Aconfirmation screen is displayed select Log Out or Cancel WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 279 Administration and Accounting Accounting Copy Activity Report Use this option to print a report after each copy session The report details the type of job and the number of copies made during the session This feature is inten
31. This will produce better alignment of the finished stack but will reduce the output speed of the device Staple Productivity Mode This feature enables the Administrator to improve productivity when stapling long edge feed landscape jobs The feature is only available if your device is fitted with a High Volume Finisher e Enable delivers landscape documents stapled in the top right corner e Disable delivers landscape documents stapled in the top left corner Display Brightness Enables you to adjust the brightness of the touch screen to suit the ambient light levels e Adjust the brightness as required using the indicator Xerographic Module Cleaning This option is used to initiate the Xerographic Module Cleaning cycle This will help prolong the life of the Xerographic Module R2 and maintain image quality e Select the Clean button A message is displayed stating that Xerographic Module Cleaning is in progress e When the message disappears the cleaning cycle is complete Option Enablement If you have been instructed to enter an enablement code by the Xerox Support Center use this option to enter the code e Select the entry box and enter the code using the numeric keypad e Select Enter 260 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Contention Management The device is capable of processing several jobs at the same time such as scanning sending a fax and pr
32. Trays 1 and 2 Trays 1 and 2 are located on the front of the device and feed the majority of media sizes Media can be loaded Long Edge Feed LEF or Short Edge Feed SEF Your device uses a system of programable settings to manage the trays and media These settings are established by your System Administrator who can set Trays 1 and 2 to Fully Adjustable or Dedicated Fully Adjustable if this option is set the paper settings screen is displayed each time the tray is opened and closed The drop down menus are used to change the size type and color of the media loaded The guides automatically detect the size of media loaded and the device gives a warning if the guides are not set correctly or a non standard media size is used Dedicated when a tray is opened a screen is displayed identifying the media that should be loaded in the tray If the wrong size of media is loaded or the tray guides are set incorrectly the device gives a warning to adjust the guides Note Only the System Administrator can change the media attributes for a dedicated tray If a non standard size media is loaded or the tray guides are set incorrectly the device displays a screen showing Unknown size and asking you to confirm or change the settings If set to Adjustable the following media can be loaded in Trays 1 and 2 Up to 500 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper Weights from 60 to 200 gsm 16 to 53 lb Note For 80 gsm paper capacities are slightly lower than
33. e Booklet Fold folds the booklet Z Bookiet Margins 2 e Booklet Fold and Staple staples the booklet in the center and then folds H lan e Booklet Paper Size use Automatically Select to enable the Creep 0 0 1 0 Points printer to select the paper size for the job To select a paper size i for the job deselect the checkbox and use the drop down menu WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 163 Print Layout Watermark Booklet Margins control whether the Booklet Layout feature fits the virtual pages into the printable area of the sheet or into the full physical size of the sheet Standard ensures the entire image fits on two pages per sheet even if the original document has little or no white space around the edges None assumes the original document has enough white space around all the borders to fit two pages per sheet for example if printing two 8 5x11 images on 11x17 paper or two A4 images on A3 paper Gutter use this option to shift the images to create a center margin for the booklet This option provides space for the booklet center fold Specify the horizontal distance in points between the page images A point is 1 72 or 35 mm Creep this option gradually shifts the images throughout the document providing less shift in the center of the booklet and more shift to the outer pages of the booklet This is useful for booklets with more than 10 pages Specify h
34. options are as follows e Auto reduces the risk of blotches or small areas that have a different texture or pattern appearance than the surrounding area e Special enhances continuous tone photographs or high frequency halftone images It is used to create smoother less grainy output for continuous tone and halftone images Select Save to save your selections and exit Image Enhancement Image Enhancement provides options for improving the quality of the output by reducing the background or adjusting the contrast The options are Background Suppression This enhances originals that have colored backgrounds by reducing or eliminating the background on the output copy This option is useful when your original is on colored ale paper Po 2 Background Suppression Contrast e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress nwn l oo unwanted background J e Select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature P w off particularly when e The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals e The original has a gray or colored border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals Contrast This feature controls the image density on the output and compensates for an original that has too much or too little contrast on the image e Move the indicator towards high to reproduce more vivid blacks and whites f
35. 0 02 2205022000 0002020 0200000002 0000020020 00200008 163 165 0 000 0 0 166 40000 8500002020 AVORIO 2 552 220 2 2 A WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 149 Print Introduction Introduction The WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 will produce high quality prints from your electronic documents The advanced print features of this device will enable you to create professionally finished documents at the click of a mouse button You access the printer from your PC application in the normal way through a print driver A print driver converts the code contained in an electronic document into a language that the printer can understand While you can use generic print drivers on this printer they will not enable all the features This is why you should use the print drivers that accompany this printer For instructions using the basic Print features refer to Printing a Document page 152 There are numerous print drivers for this device to enable it to be used on all the popular computer operating systems They are provided on a disc with your device or you can download the latest versions from the Xerox website www xerox com Instructions for installing the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 and print drivers are provided in the System Administrator Guide Print and Fax Drivers For Windows users there several drivers avail
36. 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 235 Paper and Media Storage and Handling 236 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Paper and Media Version 2 0 Decem ber 2010 xe OX L P Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Machine and Job Status 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 238 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Machine and Job Status 209 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Machine and Job Status Table of Contents Introduction 0 Job Status Active Jobs 005 Held Jobs 0005 Unidentified Held Jobs Completed Jobs Managing Jobs Machine Status Machine Information Faults 8 Supplies nnana nananana Billing Information WOO 0 8 Introduction Introduction This section explains how to use the Machine Status
37. 5775 5790 Fax Server Fax Image Quality The Image Quality options provide access to the features which enhance the image quality or output To access the Image Quality options select Services Home and Server Fax Then select the Image Quality tab Image Options Select Image Options to adjust the lightness and darkness of the image and to sharpen the image The options are Lighten Darken Provides a manual control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images Image Options e Move the indicator down to darken the scanned image for light originals such as pencil images e Move the indicator up to lighten the scanned image for dark originals such as halftones or originals with colored backgrounds Sharpness This provides manual control to adjust the sharpness of the scanned images e Move the indicator up to sharpen the scanned image e Move the indicator down to soften the scanned image Select Save to save your selections and exit Image Enhancement Select Image Enhancement to reduce background and adjust the image The options are Background Suppression This enhances originals that have colored backgrounds by reducing or eliminating the background from your original This option is useful when your original is on colored paper e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress unwanted background F e Select Off to turn the Backgroun
38. Agency using the Safety standards listed Standard Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL60950 1 1st Edition USA Canada IEC EN60950 1 2nd Edition This device has been manufactured under a registered 15029001 Quality system 308 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Safety and Regulations Basic Regulations Basic Regulations Xerox has tested this device to electromagnetic emission and immunity standards These standards are designed to mitigate interference caused or received by this device in a typical office environment United States FCC Regulations This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If it is not installed and used in accordance with these instructions it may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his her own expense If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the device off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or r
39. Auditron Account Management Managing auditron accounts involves setting up the account the password and limits and identifying the access level for that account After a time the limits need to be reset and you may have to delete the account Setup User Accounts and Access Rights All users of the machine must have a valid User Account to login The user is also set up with a default Group Account The counts for both User and Group Accounts are updated when a job is run on the machine Setting up user accounts involves creating a user account user numeric passwords limits and access rights 1 To create a new User Account select Accounting Settings and Internal Auditron Setup 2 Select the User Accounts and Access Rights button 3 Select the Next Open Account button to locate the next unused account number or use the up down arrows to change the account number 4 Select the User Number entry box and enter a User Number using the keypad A valid User Number is from 3 12 digits in length Leading zeros and the characters and are recognized If a User Number is not unique a message displays 5 To set the Group Account select the Group Account entry box and enter the default Group Account for the User Account 6 A Copy Limit can be set between 0 and 999 999 Select the Copy Limit entry box and enter the limit required using the keypad 7 Select the Access Rights button The access levels available are e General Account
40. Darken provides a manual control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images gt Move the indicator down to darken the scanned image for light originals such as pencil images e Move the indicator up to lighten the scanned image for dark originals such as halftones or originals with colored backgrounds e Sharpness provides manual control to adjust the sharpness of the scanned images e Move the indicator up to sharpen the scanned image gt Move the indicator down to soften the scanned image Select Save to save your selections and exit Image Enhancement Select Image Enhancement to reduce background and adjust the image contrast The options are L Image Enhancement e Background Suppression enhances originals that CR LL have colored backgrounds by reducing or eliminating j the background from your original This option is useful when your original is on colored paper e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress unwanted background e Select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature off particularly when e The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals e The original has a gray or colored border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 127 Workflow Scanning Advanced Settings e Contrast controls the image
41. EAMG e os pore ss E 20 31 00 LOG Thy OU se o22nc0e seep og sneer none E meee eee ee E 32 Enhance PROGUCHIVILY 33 34 Maintenance and Consumables e e ccc ccc cc cee cece 35 ben TOUDIESHOGUNG 54 0 454 44440404460 09504 e sees pede 37 000000 0 00000002 00 39 0022000968 30300220 0220 9 005 000 0200 210 2 9000 TAC OCMIGTION x ace ace ea 8 42 Making CONICS e asorar tec nore 3 oot a ee ogee sd oe pean EEEE eae ai ae iene gare aaa 43 44 000 00 0002 220 020 222 2 2 CODY ODUONS EE EE ASA 50 0 20 00 AGE EENES 2 2 00 Re eine s TIG e E EERE 55 2000002200 5 22 EE E 3 000 VOTE FSS MOY 6 HEE E 70 OVEN OWN e e 22022 2000 0 tees sees sass essen 72 00008 0000300000 00 0000 DOVE FOX 0002200 2000000000 000000000 009000 200 000 92 100 8 00 0000500020 00000000 4 00 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 3 Table of Contents 109 0000 FOX OP Gres RECEIVING GO POM 20 00 E E 00 116 40000 200 2 247004 20 2024090 861 5 ce 119 OU ON ee rE E EE E EE 4 oa ns oe oe oe es ee eee eee eee 122 Workflow Scanning Options 0 ccc ccc ccc eee
42. EEEE EEEE EEE 284 DOIMWOLGRCSCl 2 00 0220220000 2000000020 00 00 284 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 1 Administration and Accounting Tools Tools The settings on the device can be setup via two options Internet Services or Tools This guide explains the options available in Tools For information about the settings available in Internet Services refer to the System Administrator Guide These options should be setup and customized by the System Administrator Therefore access to the Tools options is passcode protected Entry to the Tools pathway is via the Machine Status button on the control panel Accessing Tools 1 Press the Machine Status button 2 Select the Tools tab To have access to all the Tools options you must be logged in as an Administrator 3 Tolog in select the Log In Out button on the control panel 4 Use the keyboard to enter your User Name then select the Next button Use the keyboard to enter your Password then select the Enter button Note The default user name and password are admin and 1111 The Tools options are displayed Most Tools screens include the following buttons to confirm or cancel your choices gt Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and
43. Environment Health and Safety in relation to this Xerox device and supplies please contact the following customer help lines USA 1 800 828 6571 Canada 1 800 828 6571 Europe 44 1707 353 434 Device safety information is also available on the Xerox website www xerox com about xerox environment WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 319 Safety and Regulations EH amp S Contact Information 320 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Safety and Regulations Basic Workflow Scanning 7 Batch Send 75 267 Bates Stamp 58 Baud Rate 84 Billing Information 210 247 Black Impressions 210 Blank Inserts 57 Book Copying 52 Book Faxing 83 Booklet 47 Booklet Creation 55 157 Booklet Layout 163 BPS Bits Per Second 84 Build Job 63 90 134 140 184 Bypass Tray 227 C C Fold 48 Call for Service 38 Calling for Help 10 Canada Regulations 309 Caring for your Device 288 Chain Dial 78 Characters 97 Cleaning Tasks 34 Cleaning the Device 290 Clear All AC button 143 145 Clear All button 16 Collation 46 Color Output 125 Comment 58 Compression Capability 141 Confirmation Report 84 141 Constant Velocity Transport Glass 290 Consumables 34 Consumables Safety Information 308 Contacting Xerox 38 Contrast 51 98 106 Control Panel 16 Copier Printer Models 12 Copier Printer Scanner Model 14 Copy 21 Inserts 57 Paper Supply 45 Copy Options 44 Copy Output 46 C
44. If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features Refer to Log In Out on page 32 of Getting Started Workflow Scanning allows the user to scan a hard copy original and convert it into an electronic file The file is placed into a specified filing location on a networked server workstation or the device hard drive The settings used for scanning the original are stored in a template Using Workflow Scanning Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections Press the Services Home button and select the Workflow Scanning option The Workflow Scanning m features are displayed Select a Template for the job from the templates displayed in the list All the current settings are changed to the settings in the template WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 123 Workflow Scanning 1 Workflow Scanning Options Select the required features for your scanning job using the touch screen If required modify the template settings from the options on the Workflow Scanning Advanced Settings Layout Adjustment and Filing Opti
45. Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards Select Add to add the E mail address to the Recipient list Continue adding E mail addresses until all the recipients have been added to the list Select Close 1 2 All the recipients are displayed in the Recipient list If an Address Book has been setup the Search option can be used to search for E mail addresses Refer to Address Book on page 104 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 101 Fax Internet Fax Message This option is used to enter a message for the internet fax The message is the text contained within the internet fax and not the subject line 1 Using the keyboard enter the message required e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered e To delete a character use the backspace key or to I III M DAE clear the entire entry select the X Sa e Use the Keyboards button to access additional e s lels EEE language keyboards 2 Select Save to save your selections and exit Reply To The Reply To feature enables you to include an E mail address you want the recipient to reply to For example you can enter your personal E mail address If you logged in through authentication and your details are available in the Address Book your E mail address is displayed 1 Using the keyboard enter the message required e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered gt To delete a character use the ba
46. Layout Watermark Advanced Note Some features are only supported by specific 5 vanced Settings printer configurations operating systems or driver lt a Document Options S ES Paper Output types You may see more features or options listed mn ES Booklet Layout than your specific device supports BI Think Green w La Driver Defaults Advanced Printing Features Enabled TrueType Font Substitute with Device Font TrueType Font Download Option Automatic PostScript Output Option Optimize for Speed PostScript Language Level 3 Send PostScript Error Handler Yes Saved Settings reve 2 166 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Print xe OX k i 2010 Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 E mail 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 168 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 E mail Table of Contents ieee aceeeeed 170 00000 20
47. PISINGINIG R 12 porro een edecuvewuvedess duce cus 12 oe 13 3 13 15 0 13 0000000000 000000 RR 134 BUNGJIOD 8 134 Creating Templates sscresiesnirrirserrer rttr enon EEEE EEA EEEE EENE 135 New nle eT 15 Modifying a Template espr eirge A AE E E ER 136 Copying a Temoldte anid ocd mien sieeve edeced an asaeaa od ee eedeedankeaenwas 137 Deleting a Template 2 0000 137 Template ODUONS 2000 00 000000000 EAA anes owe 137 Scan tO 00 22 22222022 EE EEES ECEE ESEAS 142 Creating a Private Folder 2 08 142 Using scan tO eile one 143 0 ONE 22 0000 20020000 20402000 0010 0000 00000 AAA 145 USING Scan to Home 02 2250029 200 0 0 145 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 1 Workflow Scanning Introduction Introduction Workflow Scanning enables the creation of an electronic image file by scanning an original hard copy document Use Workflow Scanning when both your device and your 2 ny computer have access to the same specified filing location N 5 The scanned file is placed in a network filing location m i known as a repository as specified by the template m selected on the device The standard Workflow Scanning option enables the electronic images to be stored and retrieved from a server or workstation on the network Two further options are available e S
48. Paper Output screen of the print driver The Fax Recipients screen will automatically open Default Phonebook Personal Phonebook a Personal Phonebook Select the Preferences button at the bottom of the Fax Recipients C Documents and Setings Y26LJEX9 My T screen to access the Phonebook Preferences screen gt e Personal Phonebook information is stored in files with a suffix Shared LDAP Phonebook of pb or xpd You can create numerous files of this type and 6 00 O select them as your personal phonebook They will then appear User Preferences as phonebook options on the Add From Phonebook screen You can create a personal or shared phonebook using this option or Pen ee you can import a comma separate value CSV file Windows Aways Use Curent Cover Sheet Notes only You can store up to 1 000 entries per phonebook e Shared Phonebook shows the location of a shared phonebook which is accessed by many users and is typically located on a network server You can copy information from the shared phonebook to a personal phonebook but shared phonebooks are generally set to read only mode e Shared LDAP Phonebook shows the location of a shared LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol phonebook if enabled LDAP is a protocol that is often used for corporate address books This phonebook is located on a network server and accessed by many users You can copy information f
49. Paper Tray 5 is an optional high capacity paper source The standard tray has a single tray which is set to A4 or 8 5x11 LEF Two optional kits are available to allow Tray 5 to feed A3 or 11x17 SEF and A4 or 8 5x11 SEF e Bypass Tray accommodates most types of media in a range of sizes between A6 and A3 SEF 4 25x5 5 and 11x17 SEF Note LEF Long Edge Feed and SEF Short Edge Feed Load paper Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line If loading trays 1 or 2 make sure that the paper guides are in the correct position for the paper size Adjust each guide by squeezing the clamp mechanism and sliding the guide to just touch the edge of the media If loading the Bypass Tray locate the media against the front of the tray and move the rear guide to touch the rear of the stack If loading Tray 5 press the button to open the door Wait for the paper tray to lower The media required is displayed on the screen Place the media in the tray Media must be positioned against the right side of the tray Close the paper tray or tray door as required The Bypass Tray remains open If the Paper Settings screen is displayed select the size type and color of the paper you have loaded and select Confirm If the tray is a Dedicated tray the paper size and type specified on the touch screen must be loaded and the Paper Settings screen is not displayed For information about loading special media refer to Media Types
50. Print Reports on page 245 of Machine and Job Status WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 209 Internet Services 1 2 Status Status The Status option provides information about the device Welcome The Welcome page provides information L about setting up and installing your 0 Wels HZ pay Pre WCennsh Toe hir Aired berini Ef 35 maai rt 083 15 dart a hee Pe mle of Frere add ERKE 3 eh A Re Gere mutica balers wah 88 5 dev l ce Ema 5 ow bees darnig deere the 9569 pee dreti eed eu ere R ce T taba sa p Once you have reviewed this page it can Cet Sm Wek Pape Ao be switched off using the Don t Show Based eba we nd mented Welcome Page again option Description amp Alerts LE ere mmm A description of any problems or Alertson the device Billing Information Provides the machine serial number the number of black impressions and the number of color impressions made Usage Counters Provides more detailed information on device usage such as number of copied sheets number of printed sheets number of faxes and number of large sheets 210 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Internet Services Status Configuration This section displays the configuration of the device and the option to print a conf
51. Private Queue you will need to log in to access your job folder Note The Held Jobs tab becomes the My Held Jobs tab to indicate that the user has logged in The tab lists only print jobs belonging to the logged in user e Ifthe machine has been set to Hold All Jobs in a Public Queue log in will not be needed unless the job was submitted as a secure print job e If all jobs in a folder are passcode protected the machine will request a valid passcode before allowing the contents of the folder to be viewed Enter a valid passcode for any of the jobs in the folder and the job list for that folder is displayed e Ifa folder contains a combination of passcode protected and User ID protected jobs you must log in to the machine using your User ID and password in order to view the jobs 242 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Machine and Job Status Job Status Unidentified Held Jobs The Unidentified Held Jobs tab displays a list of unidentified print jobs that have been held in accordance with the Unidentified Job Policies Identified jobs are held in the Held Jobs tab Up to 150 jobs can be displayed The Owner Name and Status of each job i is shown Select the Job Status button on the control panel The Active Jobs list is displayed Select Unidentified Held Jobs The list of held jobs is displayed Use the scroll bar to access all the folders in the list If the machine s unidentified job policy has been set to
52. The Document Management feature enables users to 6 Pow assign descriptive data to a scanned job The descriptive data can be accessed by other software applications to assist in searching indexing and the automated processing of scanned documents The Document Management data requirements are individually defined and programmed within the workflow scanning template The Document Management data fields can be either mandatory or optional If the data is mandatory the user is prompted to enter the data before scanning is allowed Once the required data is entered the user can commence scanning the job If the data is optional the user is prompted to enter the data but can complete the job without the data if required Add File Destinations This option allows you to select additional network locations as filing destinations for your scanned documents These additional filing destinations must be set up by the System Administrator using Internet Services 1 Select the destination required from the list 2 To view information about the destination select View Details 3 Select Save to save your selections and exit The destination filing path and information is displayed WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 133 Workflow Scanning Job Assembly Job Assembly This tab provides access to the Build Job feature for FP emer mea o y opomn compiling jobs which have different originals or programing
53. The media required is displayed on the screen Ensure the correct media is loaded Place the media in the tray Media must be positioned against the right side of the ames e Load pre printed paper face up and with the top towards the front of the device e Load hole punched paper with the holes on the right edge Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line Close the door When the door is closed the elevator rises to feed the media WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Paper and Media 1 230 Tray 6 Inserter Tray 6 Inserter Tray 6 Inserter is an optional paper tray for use with the High Volume Finisher and is used for inserting post process sheets in the set This tray provides a very convenient and efficient way of adding pre printed covers or inserts to a job The following media can be loaded in Tray 6 Inserter e Upto 250 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper e Weights from 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 56 lb Note For 80 gsm paper capacities are slightly lower than specified e Media sizes e A4or 8 5x11 SEF or LEF e 8 5x13 SEF e 8 5x14 SEF e A3or11x17 SEF e Media types e Plain Bond or Recycled e Punched e Letterhead e Pre printed Tray 6 Inserter must not be used to feed labels envelopes tabs or carbonless paper The Bypass Tray can be used for these media types Loading Tray 6 Inserter A4 or 8 5x11 media may be loaded either long edge feed or short ed
54. To Cc or Bcc for the recipient using the drop _ Ts down menu to the left of the entry box LI Sides Using the keyboard enter the E mail address e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered gt To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the button gt Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards Select Add to add the E mail address to the Recipient list Continue adding E mail addresses until all the recipients have been added to the list then select Close All the recipients are displayed in the Recipient list Note If E mail encryption is enabled E mails may only be sent to recipients that have a valid Encryption certificate Encryption ensures that the message cannot be read by anybody except the intended recipient In addition with E mail signing enabled the recipient can be sure that the message has actually come from the person marked as the sender If an address book has been setup enter the name of the recipient and select Search A list of matching recipients is displayed Select the E mail address required and select Add To Add Cc or Add Bcc from the drop down menu The E mail address is added to the recipient list Multiple recipients can be added to the Recipient list in this way Select Close to exit If you are logged in to the machine and your E mail address is known the Add Me button will be displayed Press the Add Me bu
55. Tray Status 245 Trays 1 and 2 223 Trays 3 and 4 225 Tri Folded 48 Troubleshooting Settings 282 Troubleshooting Tips 296 Turkey RoHS Regulation 310 Type of Original 104 175 Type of Originals 50 Types of Media 233 Types of Original 76 95 125 U United States FCC Regulations 309 Update Templates Template Update 129 Usage Information 247 User Guide 37 User Guides 245 Using Saved Settings 66 W Waste Toner Bottle 288 Watermark 165 WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC 318 Workflow Scanning 27 122 Templates 135 Workflow Scanning Options 123 Workflow Scanning Templates 122 X Xerographic Module 288 Xerox Customer Support 284 Xerox Support Center 10 XPS 132 182 Z Fold 8 328 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Index
56. Update Templates feature retrieves new or updated templates or workflows and removes outdated items from T evn waue you arta econ eons or cin ompai noana a the list until the siystem automatically updates the Templata List Caution Tho Template Update can tae seve minutes and consequently should ba used only whan necessary Maximum Number of Templating to be displayed 250 1 Select Update Template List to retrieve updated template information immediately 2 Select the Update List option to confirm an update is required 3 Select Close Note Selecting this option may cause a delay and the Workflow Scanning service will be unavailable for several minutes The delay does not affect the other services available on the device WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 129 Workflow Scanning rigina Size D Edge Erase ay Edges 0 20 Layout Adjustment Layout Adjustment The Layout Adjustment options allow you to manipulate the scanned image and enhance the appearance and Style cremation of your output To access the Layout Adjustment options select Services Home and Workflow Scanning Then select the Layout Adjustment tab Original Orientation Use to specify the orientation of the originals being scanned The orientation of the images on the originals must match the orientation selected The device uses this information to identify if the Original Orientation Fer
57. a report when there is broadcast or multi poll fax activity e Always Print prints a report after each broadcast or multipoll fax transmission e Print on Error is selected if the report is required only when an error occurs e Disable switches off the report e Transmission Broadcast Report Appearance is used to add an image of the front page of the fax to your report e Reduced Image is used to add the image e No Image is selected if an image is not required e Transmission Report provides information on an individual transmission e Always Print prints a report after each fax transmission e Print on Error is selected if the report is required only when an error occurs e Disable switches off the report e Select Close to return to the previous screen Optional Services This option is used to setup the optional services available on the device To enable a service select Enable Some services require a PIN code to activate the service The PIN code is provided when the service is purchased The following services are available e ID Card Copy e Workflow Scanning e Color Scanning e E mail e Internet Fax e Image Overwrite Security e Network Accounting e Immediate Image Overwrite e Server Fax gt Embedded Fax e Save Job for Reprint e Searchable File Formats e Smart Card WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 271 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Once a service has been enabled it may require
58. access all the options e Auto Select automatically selects the appropriate paper size for each original based on the size of the original and any directly selected magnification ratios e Alternatively you can select a paper tray that contains the size and type of paper you require The size and type of media loaded in each tray is displayed When the More button is selected the Paper Supply renan Sn RRR RR screen is displayed showing all the trays and the size color ae and type of media loaded in each tray i ha pe wa e Auser can select which tray to use from this list The chosen tray is highlighted in blue s by your System Administrator and the same size color ee 5 Plan White Fully Adjustable and type of media is loaded in more than one other tray the device will automatically switch from the active tray to another if media in the active tray runs out e If the Auto Tray Switching feature has been enabled Select Save to save your selections and exit WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 45 Copy Copy Options 2 Sided Copy The device provides options to make one or two sided copies from one or two sided originals using either the document feeder or the document glass The options are e 1 gt 1 sided use this option if your originals are printed on one side and you want single sided copies e 1 gt 2 sided use this option if your originals are print
59. an Internet Fax nnns nn nnen err nner r roo nr r rrrrro rreren 100 NCW IRECIDICIE aeara rer oats sue a Sees pene ee RESES 101 MOJO 00 0 0200 00 0229020200 0008 102 REDIY 0 00 eee 102 PION wiccenccenqsecaccsesuceusee gees ence ce news neceuee 103 000 0000020000 103 OUP CONOK eera 25 4476 4 0544 cs sepa ee esn cece sans been eee ey eee TS 103 SECO 55 45 ca E E E eee ae ee ee eee eenee eet acnedencaes 104 Irae TV Oe casero pc oon area ates vaso eos ead wens gegen ease sorte anne 104 Addos BOOK 104 Advanced Settings 4 cele etieweas edie wate cines 105 Layout AGIOS sn TTT 107 Intenet FOC tepai EEN EAE EEE Seer 108 FOX 2000000000 0000000008 109 FOX TOME GCOBHONS aac 0 111 116 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 69 Fax Fax Overview Fax Overview There are several Fax services which can be installed or enabled on your device These are as follows Fax If Fax is installed your device is connected directly to a telephone line and therefore gives s you direct control over your fax transmissions This type of fax travels over normal telephone lines and will therefore be charged at telephone rates Using Fax enables you to scan your documents and send them to most types of fax machines that are connected to the telepho
60. and Job Status functions These are both accessed by buttons on the control panel e Job Status displays all the jobs in the job list waiting to be processed and the completed jobs Each list can be viewed by selecting the relevant tab e Machine Status provides information about the installed options on your device the status of the paper trays and consumables user documentation and fault information The serial number and device details are also provided along with usage information such as the number of impressions and number of scanned images 240 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Machine and Job Status Job Status Job Status The job lists can be accessed by pressing the Job Status button Information about current jobs and completed jobs is displayed Active Jobs This screen displays all the jobs currently in the list waiting to be processed Each job is identified with the following information Owner Name and Status The Active Jobs list 8 up to 150 jobs e Select the Job Status button on the control panel The Active Jobs list is displayed Use the scroll bar to access all the jobs in the list The most recently submitted job is displayed at the bottom of the list gt The sequence of jobs can be altered by promoting or deleting jobs in the list gt The Status is updated as the jobs are processed and printed The following Status information can be shown e Printing the device is curre
61. color factory fit 0000 fit Color Scanner used to scanincolor factoyfit Color Scanning Enablement kit a pin code is provided which enables color scanning capabilities Network Accounting enables the tracking of device usage for Print Copy and Scan jobs from multiple devices over the network Xerox Standard Accounting is an accounting tool which tracks the number of Copy Print Workflow Scanning Server Fax and Fax jobs for each user Foreign Interface Device enables the attachment of a third party access and accounting device such as a card swipe or coin operated unit a Requires the Basic or Extended Fax Kit or a Third Party Fax Server to be configured and installed b Requires a Third Party Fax Server to be configured and installed WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 13 Getting Started Services and Options WorkCentre Copier Printer Scanner Models Key e Standard 0 Optional Not Available WorkCentre Description 35 40 45 55 65 75 90 Document Feeder feeds 75 35 model only or 100 single or double sided documents Documents from AR to A3 5 5 x8 5 to 11 x17 can be fed Fitted instead of the document glass cover Paper Trays 3 and 4 high capacity paper trays e ee Paper Tray 5 high capacity platform feed paper tray 2 Paper Tray 6 Post Process Inserter optional insert tray which can be fitted with the High Volume Finisher Envelope Tray this tray is fitted instead of pa
62. configuring using Internet Services For further instructions refer to the System Administration Guide Note Some services will require a Reboot to activate them on the device Auto Image Rotation This feature enables the use of the Auto reduction or enlargement and Auto paper selections for both print and copy It also enables the automatic rotation of the image to fit the required paper size even if the paper is a different orientation to the original e Auto if this option is enabled the user will be able to automatically reduce or enlarge the image of the original onto a specified size of paper e Auto Paper if this option is enabled the device will automatically select paper from a tray that will produce the best fit available In addition to the basic functions when both these features are enabled the device will e Automatically rotate images when using the Booklet Creation feature gt Enable the 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 feature for calendar format output e Select the appropriate size of paper irrespective of orientation 272 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Network Settings Network Settings These settings are used to enter the network parameters for the system This section provides an overview of the options available Detailed instructions for network installation are provided in the System Administrator Guide Ul Biz E iP Sac Trouble Shooti
63. device e Before cleaning this device unplug the device from the electrical outlet Always use materials specifically designated for this device the use of other materials may result in poor performance and create a hazardous situation e Always exercise care when moving or relocating the device Please contact your local Xerox dealer to arrange relocation of the device to a location outside of your building e Always locate the device on a solid support surface not on plush carpet that has adequate strength to support the weight of the machine e Always locate the device in an area that has adequate ventilation and room for servicing e Always unplug this device from the electrical outlet before cleaning Note Your Xerox device is equipped with an energy saving function to conserve power when the device is not in use The device may be left on continuously Device Safety Do Not Do These A WARNING Do not use aerosol cleaners Aerosol cleaners can be explosive or flammable when used on electromechanical equipment e Never use a ground adapter plug to connect the device to a power outlet that lacks a ground connection terminal e Never attempt any maintenance function that is not specifically described in this documentation e Never obstruct ventilation openings They are provided to prevent overheating e Never remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws There are no operator serviceable areas within these covers
64. device the PDF selection may not be compatible when the resolution is set to 200 dpi Select Save to save your selections and exit Acknowledgement Report Using this feature a confirmation report is printed indicating the delivery status of the internet fax job Each internet fax recipient provides a delivery receipt when the job is received Once the receipt is received by the device the report is compiled and printed Note The report may be delayed depending on how quickly the recipients respond Print Report gt The device requests a receipt from each of the F acknowiedgement oe recipients when the Internet Fax is sent 7 This feature wil wail for a delivery receipl Irom each recipient of the oipe Fax job and will print a report containing the delivery statue of each il bren e Once the recipients acknowledge receipt the report is O Note The report may be delayed due to the recipient s response lime compiled and printed automatically Select Save to save your selections and exit 108 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax from PC Fax from PC Select or create a document on your PC With your document open in your application select Print then select your WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 printer If the printer is not available in the menu it may have not been installed correctly contact your System Administrator for advice Select the Properti
65. e Failed page s with a Cover Page is selected if only the failed pages should be resent with a cover page e Whole Job without a Cover Page is selected if the entire job should be resent but not the cover page e Whole Job with Cover Page is selected if the whole job including the cover page should be resent 266 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Audio Line Monitor When the device is transmitting a fax the dialing handshake and digital data creates audible beeps and buzzing sounds The audio line monitor allows a user to listen to the call progress and hear the number dialled and the beginning of the handshake gt Enable allows the transmission tones to be heard Select High Medium or Low Set the Line Monitor Duration between 1 and 25 Seconds e Disable deactivates the sounds Transmission Header Text When a fax is sent it includes the telephone number name date time and page number at the top of each page of the fax You can add personalized sentence to the header of all the fax pages using this option e Enter the text required on the Header Up to 30 characters can be entered Use the backspace key to delete an incorrect character entry or use Clear Text to delete the entire entry Batch Send Use this feature to enable a user to send several fax jobs to the same destination in one transmission using the Delay Send option For information about using Ba
66. e Never locate the machine near a radiator or any other heat source 306 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Safety and Regulations Operational Safety Information e Never push objects of any kind into the ventilation openings e Never override or cheat any of the electrical or mechanical interlock devices e Never place this device where people might step on or trip on the power cord gt This device should not be placed in a room unless proper ventilation is provided Please contact your local Authorized dealer for further information Emergency Power Off If any of the following conditions occur turn off the device immediately and disconnect the power cable s from the electrical outlet s Contact an authorized Xerox Service Representative to correct the problem gt The device emits unusual odors or makes unusual noises gt The power cable is damaged or frayed e Awall panel circuit breaker fuse or other safety device has been tripped e Liquid is spilled into the machine gt The machine is exposed to water e Any part of the device is damaged Disconnect Device The power cable is the disconnect device for this device It is attached to the back of the machine as a plug in device To remove all electrical power from the device disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet Ozone Safety Information This device will produce ozone during normal operation The ozone produced is heavier t
67. entries up or down in the table Some features are only supported by specific printer configurations operating systems or driver types You may see more features or options listed than your specific device supports Add Covers Use this option to add blank or printed covers to your printed document 1 To adda cover select the Add Covers button above the table 2 Select the Cover Options required e Front Only provides a front cover e Back Only provides a back cover e Front and Back Same provides a front and back cover with the same settings on the same media e Front and Back Different provides a front and back cover with individual programing requirements and on different media if required 3 Select the Paper Settings for the selected cover options 4 Select the printing options e Blank or Preprinted inserts a blank or pre printed sheet and does not print an image e Printed uses the first page of the document to print the front cover if selected and the last page to print the back cover if selected 5 Select OK to save your selections and exit The cover details display in the table WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 159 Print Special Pages Add Inserts Use this option to add blank or pre printed inserts to your printed document To program the inserts you enter the page number of the page before the insert If an insert is required as your first page Before Page 1 can be specified I
68. feature allows you to add and remove recipients and edit the subject line of the E mail message Lisl Nall 1 To select the E mail service press the Services Home button 2 Select the E mail option Additional options and features are displayed Most feature screens include the following buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen If an option is not required use the Off option to disable a feature For instructions on using the basic E mail features refer to Sending an E mail on page 171 If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features Refer to Log In Out on page 32 of Getting Started 170 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 E mail Sending an E mail Sending an E mail 1 Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder 2 Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections 3 Pre
69. from the menu Depending on the receiving device the PDF selection may not be compatible when the resolution is set to 200 dpi e PDF A is an industry standard format for long term document preservation based on the PDF format The Advanced Settings may need checking to ensure they are appropriate for extended use e Image Only optimizes the file for viewing and printing and cannot be modified e Searchable runs the file through an Optical Character Recognition OCR process This can take a few minutes but allows the text in the file to be searchable and editable If Searchable is selected the Document Language menu becomes available Select the appropriate language from the menu File Format only The resulting file cannet be modified 182 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 E mail E mail Options e XPS XML Paper Specification is a is a Microsoft proprietary format similar to PDF e Image Only optimizes the file for viewing and printing and cannot be modified e Searchable runs the file through an Optical Character Recognition OCR process This can take a few minutes but allows the text in the file to be searchable and editable If Searchable is selected the Document Language menu becomes available Select the appropriate language from the menu e Multi Page TIFF Tagged Image File Format produces a single TIFF file containing several pages of scanned images A more specialized software is required to
70. input tray Adjust the guide to just touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections Press the Services Home button and select the Copy option The Copy features are displayed Program the required job features 4 1 211017 Plain L Bax Bypass L gt 1 B more z Select the Job Assembly tab and then Save Job for Reprint Select the option required e Copy 8 Save is used to store the job and print a copy of the job a Public Folder Ld 3 e Save Only stores the job without printing L France Select a folder location to store the job C gases Select New Job Name and enter a name for the job Geer la using the keyboard Select Save to save the job name and return to the previous screen Press Start to run the job 9 10 The job is scanned and saved with the name entered in the folder selected If Copy amp Save was selected a copy of the job is also printed Jobs can also be saved using the print driver options or Internet Services For additional information about Saving Jobs for Reprint refer to Saving a Job on page 189 of Save and Reprint Jobs WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started 30 Reprinting S
71. is required log in to the machine or select Release and enter the secure passcode For information about additional Print features refer to Printing a Document on page 152 of Print 22 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started Sending a Fax Sending a Fax Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections Press the Services Home button and select the Fax option The Fax features are displayed Enter the recipient s fax number by e Keypad Dial select the Enter Number area on the touch screen and enter the number using the numeric keypad e Manual Dial if a telephone handset is attached to the device select the Manual Dial key and dial the number using the handset or the numeric keypad e Speed Dial select the Enter Number area and enter the 3 digit speed dial number then select the Speed Dial option e Address Book select the Address Book button to access the fax address book Select an entry from the Address Book to add to the Recipient list Continue adding recipients as required and select Close to return to the previous screen If required select Add to add the number enter
72. option Je Assomty 2 Select the fax number entry field and enter the 3 digit oe CE aa pr speed dial number 2 D Address Book 3 Select Add to add the number to the Recipient list 4 Enter additional numbers as required Speed Dialing can be combined with Manual Dialing to build the Recipient list Dialing Characters Additional dialing characters can be accessed by selecting the Dialing Characters button Use this option to enter the fax number if special characters are required To enter a fax number using the dialing characters 1 Select the Dialing Characters button d Dialing Characters 2 Use the numeric keypad to enter the number plus LO Character List Dal additional dialing characters H Puce 1a Tane War tor Deal Tone The following characters are available e Dial Pause use to pause between numbers For Optional Readability Characters additional pause time add multiple pauses If Dp i Readabdiy Date you are using charge code numbers enter a pause after the fax number but before the charge code number e Pulse to Tone use to switch between pulse and tone dialing e Mask Data use to protect confidential information For example if a special charge code or credit card number is required for a call simply use the Mask Data character Select the character before entering confidential numbers After the last confidential numbers
73. option splits the document C Spit Across Pages Spit Across Pages wil spit a single lange image across several pages into 2 equal parts or the majority of the image is put on to 1 page and the remainder on the next page Select Save to save your selections and exit 82 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax Book Faxing A CAUTION Do not close the document feeder when scanning bound originals Select Book Faxing to specify which page or pages of a book are to be scanned The book original is placed face down on the document glass with the spine of the book lined up with the marker on the rear edge of the document glass Align the top of the bound original against the rear edge of the document glass The device will identify the size of the original during scanning If the pages have a black or dark colored border the device will assume that the pages are smaller than they really are To overcome this use the Custom Scan Areas feature in Original Size to enter the exact size of the page Refer to Original Size on page 82 for more information The options are e Both Pages use to scan both pages the left page of Se the book will be scanned first Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 50 mm 0 to 2 to be BD 85 deleted from the center of the book in order to delete unwanted marks reproduced from the gutter of the Oo 0 4 book L aD Fight Page Oriy e Left then Right or Right t
74. or paper towel For further information on maintenance tasks refer to General Care on page 288 of General Care and Troubleshooting 34 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started Troubleshooting Troubleshooting A variety of situations can affect the quality of your output The animations and fault messages on the device help you to locate and resolve a problem easily Some problems can be resolved by restarting your device If after rebooting your device the problem has not been resolved have a look at some of the areas below to identify solutions Problem Solution The device will not power on e Check to see that the device is not in Energy Saver Mode as indicated by the green light on the control panel Touch the user interface screen to re activate e Check to see that the power cord is correctly inserted Documents will not feed through the e Ensure that you have selected the correct service e g Copy Fax document feeder Workflow Scanning gt Ensure that all staples or paper clips have been removed from the originals e Ensure the document feeder is not overloaded a maximum of 75 documents 35 model or 100 documents other models can be loaded e Ensure that the edge guides are adjusted to touch the sides of the originals The device will not print from a e Make sure that an active network cable is connected to the workstation workstation e Check that the Network Setup is correct For
75. printing faxing optional E mailing and network scanning optional e WorkCentre Copier Printer Scanner An advanced multi functional device offering a high specification of features and functions This model is capable of copying printing scanning E mailing and faxing optional Each model has seven configurations available which provide either 35 40 45 55 65 75 or 90 copies prints a minute All configurations are fully upgradable so as to meet any future requirements you may have Please contact your local Xerox representative for further information For further assistance in identifying your model configuration and the additional options available please refer to Device Overview on page 11 All features and functions described within the User Guide relate to a fully configured WorkCentre and may not be available on your device If you require further information on any of the optional components or information on any of the other device configurations please contact your local Xerox representative Support If you need assistance during or after product installation please visit the Xerox website for online solutions and support If you require further assistance call our experts at the Xerox Support Center or contact your local representative When telephoning please quote the machine serial number Use the space below to make a note of the machine serial number To access the serial number open the front door The s
76. programing selections Press the Services Home button and select the Workflow Scanning option The Workflow Scanning features are displayed Select the folder template required from the Template Destination list If you select a private folder a password may be requested Enter the folder password using the keyboard Make programing changes to Output Color if available 2 Sided Scanning Original Type and Scan Presets as required Refer to Workflow Scanning Options on page 123 for more information Additional Workflow Scanning options are provided on each of the tabs Refer to the following sections for further information e Advanced Settings on page 127 e Layout Adjustment on page 130 e Filing Options on page 132 e Job Assembly on page 134 Press Start to scan the originals and process the Workflow Scanning job Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed The Workflow Scanning job enters the job list ready for filing WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 3 Workflow Scanning 1 Scan to Mailbox 8 Select Job Status to view all the job lists and check the status of your job For more information refer to Job Status on page 241 of Machine and Job Status The scanned images are filed in the selected folder and can be accessed using Internet Services Accessing Jobs in a Mailbox 1 To access Internet Services open the web browser from your workstation
77. purchased and installed The options available are dependent on your WorkCentre model WorkCentre Copier Printer Models Key e Standard 0 Optional Not Available WorkCentre Description 35 40 fo 55 65 75 90 Document Glass Cover a flat hinged cover for the document glass Fitted instead of the document feeder Document Feeder feeds 75 35 model only or 100 single or double sided documents Documents from AR to A3 5 5 x 8 5 to 11 17 can be fed Fitted instead of the document glass cover Paper Trays 3 and 4 high capacity paper trays e ee E ee Paper Tray 5 high capacity platform feed paper tray 5 fe e o Paper Tray 6 Post Process Inserter optional insert tray which can be fitted with the High Volume Finisher Envelope Tray this tray is fitted instead of paper tray 2 to enable envelope printing Up to 55 10 Envelope s 4 1 x 9 5 can be loaded in the tray Offset Catch Offset Catch Tray delivers collated or uncollated output delivers collated or uncollated output Offset Catch Tray delivers collated or uncollated output o fofofo Basic Office Finisher stacks collates staples and offsets your output Office Finisher stacks collates staples and offsets your output Hole punch kits are also available for this finisher High Volume Finisher collates offsets stacks and staples your output Booklet Maker Trifold and Hole Punch kits can be installed with this finisher Hole Punch
78. scan settings to match the intended purpose of the scanned documents The options are e Sharing amp Printing is used for sharing files that are Geier going to be viewed on screen and for printing most Shang aed Pring standard business documents This setting results in a small file size and normal image quality seras Pring ERSA E eo Archival Small Fila Sim keeping purposes This setting results in the smallest ane file sizes and normal image quality e Archival Small File Size is best for standard business documents that are stored electronically for record e OCR is best for documents that are going to be processed by Optical Character Recognition OCR software This setting results in large file sizes and the highest image quality e High Quality Printing is best for business documents containing detailed graphics and photos This setting results in large file sizes and the highest image quality e Simple Scan is used for faster processing but may result in excessively large file sizes Using this setting applies only minimal image processing and compression More is used to access all the Scan Presets options available If using this option select Save to save your selections and exit Address Book If the device has been setup to access the Network and Internal Address Books you can use them to select recipients For information about setting up address books refer to the System Admin
79. select any or all of these annotation options and specify where on the copy output they should appear You can also select the appearance of the annotations such as the font size The options are e Page Numbers to automatically print a page number in a specified position on the page Page numbers are automatically increased by one For 2 sided copy output the page number is printed on both sides and counts as two pages e Comment to add up to 50 alphanumeric characters in a specified position on the page An existing comment can be amended or a new comment can be created and edited e Date to add today s date in a specified format and position on the page The date printed is the date set on your device e Bates Stamp to add a selected Bates Stamp in a specified position on the page Bates Stamping is used primarily in the legal and business fields and consists of a set prefix such as a case number or client reference together with a page number applied to a document as it is being processed The prefix can contain up to 8 alphanumeric characters You can add a new prefix or choose an existing one from the list provided 58 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Output Format Page Numbers Use the following instructions to program Page Numbers 1 Select Output Format then Annotations and the Page Numbers button Select the On button 2 Select one of the arrow buttons to determine the position of the pag
80. slightly lower than specified Media sizes in the range A6 SEF to A3 SEF 4 25x5 5 SEF to 11x17 SEF Envelope sizes DL to C4 10 to 9x12 all envelopes must be fed Short Edge Feed SEF Media types Plain Bond and Recycled Punched Letterhead and Pre printed Heavyweight Transparency Labels Pre cut tabs Envelopes Rough Surface Note Labels can only be printed 1 sided WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 7 Paper and Media Bypass Tray Loading the Bypass Tray Your device alerts you if the Bypass Tray is selected for a job and the media requested does not match the media currently loaded It also warns you if the tray runs out of paper during a job 1 Make sure the tray is in the down position For larger media use the tray extension 2 Place the media on the tray Locate the media to the right edge e Load pre printed paper and labels face up and with the top towards the front of the device e Load hole punched paper with the holes on the right e Load transparencies face up with the white strip on the right For information about loading tabs refer to Media Types on page 233 Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line 3 Make sure that the guides just touch the paper The paper settings for the tray are displayed on the touch screen The tray detects the position of the side guide to determine the size of the media 4 Confirm or change the settings as required
81. specific life expectancy and will occasionally need to be replaced to maintain good image quality This option is used to set the interval in days between the appearance of the Re order message and the day that the new module should be installed e Reorder Notification enter the number of days notification required between 1 and 25 e Cancel Current Notifications once the re order message has appeared and you have placed your order for a new module you can switch the message off by selecting this button Fuser Module Replacement The Fuser Module R3 has a specific life expectancy and will occasionally need to be replaced to maintain good image quality This option is used to set the interval in days between the appearance of the Re order message and the day that the new module should be installed e Reorder Notification enter the number of days notification required between 1 and 25 e Cancel Current Message s once the re order message has appeared and you have placed your order for a new module you can switch the message off by selecting this button WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 257 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Toner Cartridge Reordering Toner usage depends on the type and the number of images printed The device calculates how long the toner will last according to your usage and displays the information on the Machine Status Supplies screen It also uses this information to inform y
82. specified Media sizes in the range A5 LEF to A3 SEF 5 5x8 5 LEF to 11x17 SEF Custom sizes are also supported Media types e Plain Bond and Recycled e Punched e Letterhead and Pre printed e Heavyweight e Pre cut tabs e Rough Surface Trays 1 and 2 must not be used to feed labels transparencies or envelopes The Bypass Tray can be used for these media types The optional Envelope Tray can be used in place of Tray 2 for envelopes WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 3 Paper and Media Trays 1 and 2 Loading Trays 1 and 2 If Tray 1 or Tray 2 is set as a Dedicated tray the media requested must be loaded in the tray and the settings cannot be adjusted A CAUTION A problem will occur if a tray is opened while it is being used to feed media Do not open Tray 1 if Tray 2 is open 1 Open the tray 2 Place the media in the tray Media must be positioned against the left side of the tray e Load pre printed paper face down and with the top towards the front of the device e Load hole punched paper with the holes on the left edge Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line 3 Make sure that the paper guides just touch the paper gt To position the right side guide squeeze the clamp mechanism and slide the guide to touch the right edge of the media gt To position the rear guide squeeze the clamp mechanism and slide the guide to touch the rear edge of the media 4 Close
83. the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 50 mm 0 to 2 to be oo TAE P deleted from the center of the book in order to delete Y unwanted marks reproduced from the gutter of the NP pp Pages book 00000 Left then Right or Right then Left is used to scan omen both pages but the pages will be scanned in the order specified These options replace the Both Pages option and will not be displayed unless enabled in Tools Refer to Display Options on page 261 of Administration and Accounting BA Book Copying Left Page Only use to scan the left page only Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 25mm 0 to 1 to be deleted from the right side of the page in order to delete unwanted marks reproduced from the gutter of the book Right Page Only use to scan the right page only Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 25mm 0 to 1 to be deleted from the left side of the page in order to delete unwanted marks reproduced from the gutter of the book Select Save to save your selections and exit Image Shift Image Shift allows you to move the position of the image on the output page The options are Auto Center automatically centers the scanned image on the output paper To work effectively the original should be smaller than the selected output media or alternatively the image should be reduced Margin Shift moves the image up down or left right on the page to give bigger or smaller margins
84. the correct service from the local telephone company you may also have to quote the codes listed below e Facility Interface Code FIC O2LS2 e Service Order Code SOC 9 0Y A WARNING Ask your local telephone company for the modular jack type installed on your line Connecting this machine to an unauthorized jack can damage telephone company equipment You not Xerox assume all responsibility and or liability for any damage caused by the connection of this machine to an unauthorized jack If this Xerox device causes harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the Telephone Company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The Telephone Company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the device If this happens the Telephone Company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this Xerox device for repair or warranty information please contact the appropriate service center details of which are displayed either on the machine or contained within the User Guide If the device is causing harm to the telephone network the Telephone Company
85. the paper tray The paper settings for the tray are displayed on the touch screen 5 Confirm or change the settings as required 224 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Paper and Media Trays 3 and 4 Trays 3 and 4 Trays 3 and 4 are optional high capacity paper trays They are intended to be the primary feeders for the most commonly used media They are set as dedicated trays and feed only A4 or 8 5x11 LEF sized media The following media can be loaded in each tray Tray 3 e Upto 2000 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper e Weights from 60 to 200 gsm 16 to 53 lb Tray 4 e Upto 1600 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper e Weights from 60 to 200 gsm 16 to 53 lb Note For 80 gsm paper capacities are slightly lower than specified Media types which can be used in either tray e Plain Bond and Recycled e Punched e Letterhead and Pre printed e Heavyweight e Rough Surface Trays 3 and 4 must not be used to feed labels transparencies envelopes or tabs The Bypass Tray can be used for these media types WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 225 Paper and Media Trays 3 and 4 Loading Trays 3 and 4 Only A4 or 8 5x11 LEF sized media can be loaded The media size and type requested must be loaded in the tray and the settings cannot be adjusted by the user Note Your device does not warn you if the wrong sized media is loaded A CAUTION A problem may occur if a tray is opened while it is being
86. the required tray and size of paper for the copy output 2 Sided Copy is used to produce 1 or 2 sided copy output RB Copy Output is used to select collate staple or fold options depending on the finishing J device available 5 Enter the copy quantity using the numeric keypad and press Start to scan the originals 6 Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed Note The Copy job enters the job list ready for printing 7 Select Job Status to view the job list and check the status of your job If your job is held in the list it requires additional resources to print To identify the resources required select the job and select Job Details Once the resources are available the job will print WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 43 Copy Copy Options Copy Options The Copy tab includes basic copying selections such as Reduce Enlarge Paper Supply 2 Sided Copy and Copy Output Each option is described in detail below Ta T a gas T 1 L sagt O More Roinis Mong Reduce Enlarge A variety of options are available on your device to enable you to reduce or enlarge the output from your original including selecting a specific ratio either proportionately or independently and choosing from a selection of pre defined preset buttons For convenience easy access to ratio selections can be found on the Copy tab in the Reduce Enlarge area Use
87. the slider to the left to darken the image or to the right to lighten the image A graphical representation of the adjustment is shown Saved Settings iene 2 162 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Print Layout Watermark Layout Watermark The Layout Watermark tab contains settings for selecting page layout booklet layout and watermark options Paper Output Special Pages Image Options Layout Watermark Advanced Page Layout Pages Per Sheet N Up Some features are only supported by specific printer configurations operating systems or driver types You may see more features or options listed than your aste Ps Portrait specific device supports Sided Pont Watermark rere Saved Settings re sae Page Layout Pages Per Sheet N Up Select this option to print 1 2 4 6 9 or 16 pages on each side of a sheet of paper Selecting multiple pages per sheet saves paper and is useful when you want to review the layout of the document Booklet Layout Automatically prints 2 pages on each side of each sheet of paper ogue Booklet Finishing The print driver changes the order of the pages so that they can be Ali O None folded and stapled to create a booklet IA program additional booklet settings select the Booklet Options Booklet Paper Size button Automatically Select
88. time between 1 and 10 minutes using the slide bar e Disable should be selected if you do not want the device to automatically return to the default settings after a set period of time Auto Resume Timer if the device is stopped during a job this feature determines if the device automatically resumes the job after a set period of time or whether it waits for user intervention to resume the job This can prevent a user leaving the device in a stopped or paused state e Auto Resume is selected to automatically resume stopped operations at the time designated Select the period of time the device waits before resuming using the arrow buttons between 15 and 120 seconds e Wait for User instructs the system to remain stopped until a user selects Resume or Cancel Incomplete Scan if a job is scanning using the document feeder it can be interrupted by pressing the Stop button on the control panel before all the documents have been scanned If the documents are removed from the document feeder this timer determines the time before the partially scanned job is deleted from memory This prevents the memory from storing partially scanned jobs e Enable instructs the device to timeout after the specified period of time Select the period of time between 1 and 10 minutes using the slide bar e Disable if this option is selected the device will not delete partially scanned jobs from memory WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administrat
89. used to feed media 1 Opening the tray automatically lowers an elevator in the base of the tray 2 The media required is displayed on the screen Ensure the correct media is loaded 3 Place the media in the tray Media must be positioned against the left side of the tray e Load pre printed paper face down and with the top towards the front of the device e Load hole punched paper with the holes on the left edge Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line 4 Close the paper tray When the tray is closed the elevator rises to feed the media 226 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Paper and Media Bypass Tray Bypass Iray The Bypass Tray is a paper tray on the left hand side of your device and can be folded away when not in use It is primarily intended for use as a small quantity special materials feeder and accommodates media of all types including transparencies non paper backed envelopes and tabs When media is detected in the Bypass Tray a paper settings screen is displayed The drop down menus are used to change the size type and color of the media loaded The guides automatically detect the size of media loaded and the device gives a warning if the guides are not set correctly or a non standard media size is used The following media can be loaded in the Bypass Tray Up to 100 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper Weights from 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 56 lb Note For 80 gsm paper capacities are
90. when a message actually instructs you to do so To replace a Customer Replaceable Unit follow the instructions on the touch screen or use the instructions provided with the consumable A WARNING When replacing consumables DO NOT remove the covers or guards that are fastened with screws You cannot maintain or service any of the parts that are behind these covers and guards Do NOT attempt any maintenance procedure that is NOT specifically described in the documentation supplied with your device 288 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 General Care and Troubleshooting General Care Staple Cartridges and Hole Punch Waste If your device is equipped with a finisher or a convenience stapler you will be required to replace the staple cartridge or cartridges when the device displays a message instructing you to do so If your finisher has the optional hole punch unit you will also be required to empty the hole punch waste container when prompted by the device The staple cartridge for the Basic Office Finisher contains 3000 staples The Office Finisher and High Volume Finisher staple cartridges hold 5000 staples each The High Volume Finisher with Booklet Maker has 2 additional staple cartridges located within the Booklet Maker each of these cartridges holds 2000 staples To replace a staple cartridge follow the instructions provided with the new staple cartridge The hole punch waste container is a catch tray that colle
91. you have selected all the options you require select OK 8 Select OK on the print driver screen and OK on the Print screen The Fax Confirmation screen will appear with the list of recipients you have chosen 9 If you wish to make any changes edit the details by selecting the button with a pencil icon If the details are correct select the OK button and your fax will be submitted to the device job list ready to be transmitted 10 Select the Job Status button on the control panel to display the job list Your job will be displayed in the list If there are no other jobs in the list your job may have already been processed For further information refer to Job Status on page 241 of Machine and Job Status 110 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax from PC Fax from PC Options Recipients Use the Recipients option to enter a recipient or group of recipients for your fax Select Fax as the Job Type on the Paper Output screen of the print driver The Fax Recipients screen will automatically open Edit Fax Recipient This screen displays the recipients for the current fax It will 8 normally be empty To add a new recipient select the Add ee Required Recipient button ARE Enter the following information for the recipient N ame Telephone Number e Fax Number e Organization e Telephone Number a achat e E mail Address e Mailbox Select the Save to Personal Phonebook if you want to add the recipie
92. 0 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 E mail E mail These E mail options provide access to features which are i E pml Options Job Assambly required for programing basic E mail jobs Details such as the recipients addresses Reply To information and the subject are entered here Freer Too Lae Banas ees New Recipient Use this option to enter details of all the recipients of the E mail To enter the recipient details 1 Select New Recipients 2 Select To Cc or Bcc for the recipient using the drop down menu to the left of the entry box GS New Recipient 3 Using the keyboard enter the E mail address e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered ETA LIL e To delete a character use the backspace key or to eS clear the entire entry select the X button e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards 4 Select Add to add the E mail address to the Recipient list 5 Continue adding E mail addresses until all the recipients have been added to the list Select Close All the recipients are displayed in the Recipient list If an Address Book has been setup the Search option can be used to search for E mail addresses Refer to Address Book on page 176 Message This option is used to enter a message for the E mail The message is the text contained within the E mail and not the E mail subject line 1 Using the keyboard enter the me
93. 155 Paper and Media Overview 222 Paper Loading 19 Paper Size Preference Setting 255 256 Paper Storage and Handling 235 Paper Supply 45 Paper Tray Management Settings 255 Paper Tray Status 210 245 Paper Trays 1 and 2 223 3 and 4 225 5 229 6 Inserter 231 Bypass 227 Loading the Bypass Tray 228 Loading Tray 5 230 Loading Tray 6 231 Loading Trays 1 and 2 224 Loading Trays 3 and 4 226 Trays 222 Paper Types 233 Paper Output 153 PDF 108 132 182 PDF A 132 182 Polling 88 Polling a Mailbox 88 Power Down 18 Power Off 17 Print Quality Problems 282 Security 281 Timers 258 Settings 252 253 Setup Accounting 275 Sharpness 50 97 105 127 177 Shifting the Image 53 Size of Original 82 Size of Originals 52 98 107 130 140 SMart eSolutions 211 Software Reset 284 Software Versions 246 Special Pages 159 Speed Dialing 73 74 Standard Size Required 256 Staple Cartridges 34 289 Stapled 46 Stapled Booklets 47 Stapling 156 Start button 16 Starting Rate 84 Status Information 210 245 Stop button 16 Storage and Handling 235 Store in Mailbox 86 Stored Addresses 104 Stored Fax Numbers 73 Server Fax 93 Subject 103 175 Supplies Information 247 Support 284 Support Center 10 Suppress Background 51 Suppressing Background 105 127 177 Switch Off 17 Switch On 17 T Template Image Settings 141 Template Creation 135 Template Deletion 135 Template Options 137 Temp
94. 22200200 020002020 22 02 0500022 PANO popes E E E EA E E E 173 ETEN EREE 0 0 173 RODY 000000 00800 000 174 18 Ee 1 00 2000200000 000000 175 Gut TRT 175 SCCM 6 5 5 eee eee eae es es a es ee a eect AEE 175 anaes aeaes 175 1 1 2 2 9 2224422454 Orignal TYPE SCCM 0 000000100 5000000000 045 0800004000 200020020 0000 176 POCVESS BOOK 0 0 0 0 cee cae ess 176 177 Advanced Settings E E E E EEEE E AEEA E AAA 177 0 Image Enhancement 0 26 26 000 302 177 178 0000000000 20 200002220 000 07 2000000 RESOIMUIOM 179 ere emer oniowonen 0 000 000 gt 00 Fle Layout 560 120 2154002 0212220324 180 con 25 aiaee a eee eu EU ee EEE 180 ONIGIN GV AANEEN 181 Ss e e 0000020000 000000 181 182 00 0000000 182 0 2020000000 2022200000 2 02 FUE NOME enroaa ee eee aes 182 PING FONOL EAA N 184 IODA SEMMY JOD 2 22 EEEIEE CAERE EERE EEEE E T 0000000000 E areeeees 184 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 169 E mail Introduction Introduction E mail enables the creation of an electronic image file by scanning an original hard copy document The scanned image is E mailed to the specified E mail recipient or recipients over the internet or intranet Using the E mail
95. 531 341 the aiena of the imagi on the orignal document H sra the piike glans the orientation an seen batons haning 5 ower on fe dart images require rotating to produce the required output e Portrait Originals the images on the originals are in a portrait orientation A graphical representation of the image orientation is shown when the option is selected e Landscape Originals the images on the originals are in a landscape orientation A graphical representation of the image orientation is shown when the option is selected Select Save to save your selections and exit Original Size Original Size allows you to specify automatic size detection of the originals mixed size originals or the specific size of the image to be scanned The options are e Auto Detect is the default setting and enables automatic size sensing The size detected is matched to a standard size paper e Preset Scan Areas allows you to define the size of your original from a list of pre set standard Sk ke RR T i l Original sizes You can view the list by using the scroll bar e Custom Scan Areas is used to enter a specific area for scanning Measure the area to be scanned on the original and enter the X and Y axis measurements into the fields provided Only the area specified is scanned e tuto Detect Original Size e Mixed Size Originals allows you scan documents ong containing different size pages
96. 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 93 Fax Server Fax Dialing Characters Additional dialing characters can be accessed by selecting the Dialing Characters button Use this option to enter the fax number if special characters are required To enter a fax number using the dialing characters Select the Dialing Characters button By Dialing Characters Use the numeric keypad to enter the number plus additional dialing characters The following characters are available e Dial Pause use to pause between numbers The pause allows time to switch from an inside to an outside line during automatic dialing For additional pause time add multiple pauses If you are using charge code numbers enter a pause after the fax number but before the charge code number e Long Pause use to enter a long pause between numbers e Mask Data use to protect confidential information For example if a special charge code or credit card number is required for a call simply use the Mask Data character Select the character before entering confidential numbers After the last confidential numbers select again to turn the mask data off Characters between the symbols will appear as e Group Dial use to add another fax number to the entry if the fax is being transmitted to multiple recipients e Pulse to Tone use to switch between pulse and tone dialing e Password Check S use for remote terminal identification This character
97. 5790 Copy 41 Table of Contents ROUCO eene 222 22 0200 00 202320 ee 0 0 6 0 REGUCE 6 224 020 00 0200000 0000000000 oases PADOT SUDD ERT DE Ela e CODY 2222 ee ee ee CODY 0000000 00000 2002000000 2 meu T one ee ee ree 22 Es TR 00 68 Bres ODON 2 2 202 0 000000 0202 0220220220 0220020000 0020000000 Mage 6 000 Layout 22 20 0000 0 eu 00 ES OMIGUNON SIZES wens nee nee eee Mage SIM Ss e ne L 000 02000 nene 00 20 000000 0200002080 020 2 400 2200020002 22404220 0 0 0000 7 COVES 00 0520200 020000220 200000 ENE 5 000 220 202 80 0980 0000002000 Transparency SEDGIGUONS 2 20 Page LOVOUL 22002800 205 00000 00 00 RER JODAS 00000 A JOD 0 2 00 00 E E 2002000000 ES 5 1 0h E ee ee ee ee ee ree eee ere SAVE JOD TORR GOWN gt meant oes E Save Current SettingS 0 ccc cece eee eee e ee ee eee n eens ene eteenees Retrieve Saved Settings ccc cece eee eee e eee e eee n een ene eenes WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Introduction Introduction This section describes the copying features of the device including options for Re
98. 740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 9 Table of Contents 000 200 0 2 eee SUDDOME 2 4 2222222000 0000 0 090 0000 Device 26s eewewawernenaedghednet te dtc dniute decid aed same aed eh a aa C Tae les Hees srepet rren rE wsranenas eeereree eee eee ciabeisanseaniateseneseenaes WorkCentre Copier Printer Models 0 ccc ccc ccc cee ene lt WorkCentre Copier Printer Scanner Models 0 cc cece cence eee ee etn e eens Control Panel 0 6 Power On and 0 ccc ccc ccc cc cc ccc ce cece nce c ence eee eeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeees POWT OG oot en pe oy seg ok oe ee ee ce ee ween ceen acess 0 0 DIET ee ee eee LOGGING PODER 2 2 0 02 00 00202000 Loading eer eee ee re ee ee ere CODICES 000000 00000000 PINNA DOCUMENT gt 2000 0000 0000202020 2005
99. 93 Entry Screen Default Setting 254 Erasing the Image 131 140 European Union 310 Exceptions 159 F Fault Clearance Troubleshooting 295 Fault History 246 Fault Logs 294 Fault Messages 294 Fault messages will not clear Troubleshooting Tips 299 Faults 37 246 Faults Information 246 Fax 23 70 72 Fax Confirmation Report 84 Fax Dialing Options 73 Fax Directory 93 Fax Feature Defaults 266 Fax from PC 26 71 Fax Mailboxes 86 Fax Numbers 73 Server Fax 93 Fax Regulations 314 Fax Setup 266 Copying Books 52 Copying Templates 135 Counters 210 247 Cover Letter 76 Covers 56 159 Creating a Private Folder 142 Creating Booklet 55 Creating Booklets 157 Creating Templates 135 Current Faults 37 246 294 Current Messages 37 Custom Original Size 82 98 107 130 140 Customer Replaceable Units 34 288 Customer Replaceable Units CRUs 247 Customer Support 284 D Date 58 Date amp Time Setting 254 Default Settings 252 Delay Send 85 99 Delete Mailbox Documents 86 Deleting Jobs 244 Deleting Templates 135 Destination Services 137 Device Administration 252 Device Cleaning 34 290 Device Components 11 Device Faults 246 Device Overview 11 Device Safety 306 Device Settings 253 Device Web Pages 209 Dialing Characters 74 97 Dialing Options 73 93 Directory 176 Document Feeder 20 Document Glass 20 290 Document Glass cleaning 34
100. Access allows the user to login to any General Account and update it e Multiple Group Account Access allows the user to login to any Group Account and update it Select the Access option required for the User Account If none of the Access options are selected the user has User Account access only 8 Select Save to exit Setup Group Accounts Group Accounts provide the ability to track images for a workgroup Many users can be associated with one Group Account If the user has access to Multiple Group Accounts they can choose which Group Account to access in addition to their own User Account Use Group Accounts to track usage by workgroup or office departments No limit can be set for Group Accounts 1 To create a new Group Account select Accounting Settings and Internal Auditron Setup 2 Select Auditron Group Accounts 3 Select the Next Open Account button to locate the next unused account number or use the up down arrows to change the account number If a Group Account Number is not unique a message displays Between 1 and 255 Group Accounts can be setup Use the Next Open Active Account and Previous Account buttons to browse through the Group Accounts The Copy total for the selected Group Account displays in the Totals window 4 Toset the copy count back to 0 select the Default Account button 5 Select Close to exit WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 277 Administration and Accounting Accounting Setup G
101. Hold Jobs All Users can Manage Jobs jobs can be released or deleted by any user If the machine s unidentified job policy has been set to Hold Jobs Only Administrators can Manage Jobs held jobs can be released or deleted only by users logged in with system administration privileges Completed Jobs This option displays the jobs which have been completed on the device Up to 150 jobs can be displayed The Owner Name and Status of each job is shown e Select the Job Status button on the control panel The Active Jobs list is displayed e Select Completed Jobs gt 6 sta Local Laer 4 Copy Job 3 Camglaied 5 The list of completed jobs is displayed 2 aam 0 an Fax ob 3 d mres as Whorkiiqe Scanning Jom 4 a Gomeloted with Eres 11204221 Use the scroll bar to access all the jobs in the list 4 Local Wee E Job 8 a Completed 5 gt view the details of a completed job select the job 3 copy son me oa uang The job details are displayed Select Close to exit the Job Details screen e Select All Jobs to filter the jobs and display only Copy Print and Fax Received Jobs or Scan Jobs and Fax Sent Jobs that have been completed WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 243 Machine and Job Status Job Status Managing Jobs Job Progress When a job is processing or a job in the Active Jobs list is selected the Job Progress screen is displayed
102. Kits available with the Office Finisher and the High Volume Finisher The kits available are 2 Hole 2 Hole Legal 3 Hole 4 Hole or Swedish 4 Hole Only one kit can be fitted at one time Convenience Stapler for manual stapling The Convenience Shelf must be installed 12 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started Services and Options WorkCentre Description 35 40 45 55 65 75 90 Convenience Shelf a shelf which can be installed on the left side of the device Stand a Stand a storage area which is fitted instead of trays 3 and 4 area which is fitted instead of trays 3 and 4 Stand a storage area which is fitted instead of trays3and4 e gt e je fe ofo Basic Fax Kit Embedded this kit enables a single fax line connection Extended Fax Kit this kit enables two fax lines to be ee eee ere LAN Fax enables users to send faxes directly from their PC using the print and fax drivers Server Fax enables users to send and receive hard copy faxes via a fax server Internet Fax allows users to send or receive faxes over the internet or intranet Network Scanning Kit enables E mail and Workflow Scanning services The mono scanner is provided as standard Security kit provides additional security features such as image overwrite options Xerox Secure Access provides a card reading device to restrict access to the device Color Scanner used to scan in color Color Scanner used to scan in
103. MDONS 4 4 ee wn ieueeesawa wees Operational Safety Information e e ccc cence eee e nee eeaes Sages Renee Maintenance Information lt ca 25 R d d a a d 0 ccc cece R K RR KE RN N A NR R Consumables Product Safety Certification lt e Basic 14 0202022 42300 8 United States FCC Regulations Cangdd REGUIGUONS 2 00 NR NASIONA ANNEN UNION 4252 000 0 ATE OEO Turkey RoHS Regulation 0 ccc ccc cee cece eee CODY REGUIGUIONS miccduccarnwsaseriaaw acannon EE EE exedidsasaneses BI c SEQUCS ko oon arpa ones ore ees ee ee ee eee ae a hed eee na aera ae CANAJ he ea hacen cases eenesaoasasess COUMUMCS ohne be nk ox eenesa pies seed eae cenecenecaucuedss Fax REGUIGHONS SESS aie 6 au e ee eee a wane moe ee E E E ean oamene oa eae ee A PODO 2 0202 000000 0000000400 00 Material Safety 6 Product Recycling and Disposal 2222 22 42 casa 20 84 7 0 UNIOR 2242220 2 20 Energy Program Compliance 0 ccc LTE rele EUS serr uxegy tv ou 0 0 90000 7 ag8 5 9 a0 EH amp S Contact Information 8 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Safety and Regulations Notices and Safety Notices and Safety Please read the follo
104. Photo is used if your original is from a magazine or newspaper that contains photographs or text Lighten Darken This provides manual control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images e Move the indicator down to darken the scanned image for light originals such as pencil images e Move the indicator up to lighten the scanned image for dark originals such as halftones or originals with colored backgrounds 202 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 ID Card Copy Image Quality Background Suppression This enhances originals that have colored backgrounds by reducing or eliminating the background on the output copy This option is useful when your original is on colored paper e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress unwanted background e Select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature off particularly when gt The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals e The original has a gray or colored border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals Select Save to save your selections and exit WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 203 ID Card Copy Copying an ID Card Copying an ID Card 1 Lift up the document feeder Place the ID card face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder Pres
105. Press the Power switch The entire powering on process to power on all installed options takes less than 3 minutes Power Off 1 Press the Power switch The Power Down options are displayed e If Energy Saver is selected the device will Ta immediately enter the Power Saver Mode sa Saver Sc Sort S When in Energy Savor Moda pross any key or iouch tho io wahe tho machina appropriate to its configuration Quick Aastat ongda the current season restarts the machine and any jobs in progress will bo loat Crick Rostat may be ii oaperincing peobloms with the operation gt If Quick Restart is selected and confirmed the othe machi device will restart Any copy jobs in the job list will E Sy sa aTe amanat 2n be deleted print jobs in the job list are recovered e If Power Down is selected and confirmed the device is powered down gt If Cancel is selected the power down options will be cancelled and the device will be available for use 2 Select Power Down A confirmation screen displays a warning that data may be lost if the device is powered down Note Confirming power down will result in the deletion of any jobs currently in the queue 3 Select the Confirm button to power off the device The device will begin a controlled power down sequence It remains on for approximately 45 seconds before switching off WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 17 Get
106. The Job Progress screen provides information about the job and provides Job Control options You can also view the Job Details and the Required Resources to complete the job e Required Resources displays the resources needed to complete the job for example special paper or staples e Program Next Job is used to select the service and features required for the next job while the current job is in progress Number of Originals i e Job Controls the following job controls are available ss Tray in use e Delete removes the selected job from the list Any job can be deleted using the feature regardless of the job originator e Promote is used to move a job to the top of the list It will be completed after the current job gt Hold pauses the job until it is released or deleted e Release is selected if a Secure Print job has been held in the list and a passcode or user log in is required e Job Details provides information about the job 3 a depending on the type of job for example the submission time image quality settings the owner omes Bin fa finishing options sender s E mail address hss Tng Submited 220608 134533 Held Jobs If a job is Held in the list it requires additional resources to print or is a previously active job that has been held 1 Select the job in the list 2 If the job requires additional resources to print select Required Resources to find out the res
107. The pages must be the same width like A4 LEF and A3 SEF 8 5x11 LEF and OE 11x17 SEF other combinations are shown on the screen e p Custom Scan Aron Select Save to save your selections and exit 130 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning Layout Adjustment Edge Erase Edge Erase enables you to specify how much of the image to erase around the edges of your document For example you can remove the marks caused by punched holes or staples in your original The options are All Edges is used to erase an equal amount from all the edges Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount to be erased from 1 mm to 50 mm 0 1 to 2 0 All marks or defects within the measurement set are deleted EB Edge Erase Individual Edges enables an individual amount to be erased from each of the edges on both the first and second sides Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount for each edge from 1 mm to 50 mm 0 1 to 2 0 Scan to Edge use this option to scan to the edge of the image Select Save to save your selections and exit WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 1 Workflow Scanning Filing Options Use the filing options to specify details about the scanned Ia m eaa gere images to be stored for example the file name the file Nar O Fie Format OW Pie Already xt format and the overwrite conditions To access the Filing ell E Options select Services Home and Work
108. Tray Type required e Dedicated is set to contain one size and type of media only and cannot be adjusted by the user e Fully Adjustable is selected if the tray can be adjusted by the user to contain any media within specification This option may not be available for all trays e Tray Priority is used to indicate which tray is selected if trays contain the same media it also determines in which order the trays are displayed on the Copy tab Set the Tray Priority between 1 99 1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 255 Administration and Accounting Device Settings e Auto Selection enables the device to choose the best media for the job This setting also enables the device to automatically switch from one tray to another when a tray runs out of paper and another tray is available with the same media loaded Select Enable or Disable e Repeat the process for each of the trays as required Default Paper Settings This option allows you to set the default media type and color This is the most common media that will be used in the device and is the media that the device will feed if a specific media type is not selected e Paper Type select the default media type required from the list shown e Paper Color select the default media color required from the list shown Standard Size Required This feature determines which paper sizes are selected when Auto Paper is used during a cop
109. Version 2 0 Decem ber 2010 xe OX K Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 User Guide 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 Table of Contents OE 2 27 00000 TOOTE ET STE E EE dan 3a a bene ea eee ea eeneereseceseaeeses 10 5 lt aaaees 11 0 00 2 renee Device Overview 2022 ache adhe Services and 7 7 12 PONG OVGIVIEW nc 5 50 000000 16 6 ON OA O 2 00 0000 esd auenouanee EAEE E 17 E E E EEEE RES 19 0 Loading au are ers es fers an eee eee ee ace Pa 6 20 COPIOS 4 0 0000 0000 0000039 21 EEE E E SEER EEA 2 22222 222 NIST Le Re eases eae eens ada es aoe 23 PAUNI AFON seed R E 28 NT E 25 0 000 002008 0220900000 0020022000 Sendinga Faxtrom tne PCy osc 6 2 0400 000 NRR 26 Workflow ee Tala T 2 2405 27 AA AE 28 ba
110. Wallet and Pocket Monarch and 10 tray Wallet Place pocket type envelopes flap on short side Custom Sizes less with the flap either open or closed and facing to reliable feed and image the rear of the tray quality Move the rear guide so that it just touches the Note Do not feed window envelopes Move the right side guide so that the board backed gusset type tip of the guide just touches the envelopes padded or peal and seal Ensure the maximum fill line is visible or that envelopes or envelopes there are no more than 50 envelopes in the tray with triangular flaps Storage and Handling It is important for optimum printing that paper is stored correctly Take note of the following when storing media e Store at ambient temperature Damp paper may cause problems or poor image quality e Donot open reams of paper until they are required for use The ream wrapper contains an inner lining that protects the paper from moisture e Store ona flat surface to prevent the paper from folding or curling e Stack reams of paper carefully on top of one another to avoid crushing the edges Do not stack more than five reams on top of each other For problem free printing and copying observe the following when loading paper into the paper trays e Do not use folded or wrinkled papers e Do not load paper of varied sizes into the tray e If feed problems occur fan the media or shuffle labels before loading WorkCentre 5735
111. Workflow Scanning Workflow Scanning Workflow Scanning allows the user to scan a hard copy original and convert it into an electronic file The file is placed into a specified filing location on a networked server workstation or the device hard drive The settings used for scanning the original are stored in a template Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections Press the Services Home button and select the Workflow Scanning option The Workflow Scanning features are displayed W TFdolaultPubticlalinox Template Select a Template for the job from the templates displayed in the list All the current settings are changed to the settings in the template Select the required features for your scanning job using the touch screen If required modify the template settings from the options on the Workflow Scanning Advanced Settings Layout Adjustment and Filing Options tabs P Output Color is used to replicate the original colors or to change the output to black and white grayscale or color Note This feature may not be available on your device 2 Sided Scanning is used to select whether your originals are 1
112. a small stack of same size paper and fan transparencies to stop them sticking together If a coating of oil remains on the transparency after printing remove it with a lint free cloth Trays 1 2 3 and 4 e Load pre printed paper face down with the top to the front of the device Tray 5 and Bypass Tray e Load pre printed paper face up with the top to the front of the device Description The device supports media that has been designed for laser devices such as Xerox Recycled paper Used for hole punched and perforated media which has two or more holes along one edge for use in ring binders and notebooks Used to create images that can be projected on to a screen for presentations or as covers Transparencies are made of polyester film coated with a chemical substance Clear transparencies allow maximum presentation space Used for pre printed forms and letterhead paper WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 3 Paper and Media loading instructions Media Type Plain Recycled and Bond Punched Transparency Letterhead and Pre printed Loading Instructions Labels should be left in the printing environment for 72 hours before being used in the printer to allow them to adjust to the ambient temperature Leave labels sealed in their plastic wrapping until they are ready to be loaded into the printer Bypass Tray e Load labels face up in the Bypass Tray wit
113. able Your System Administrator may have loaded specific drivers on your PC However if the choice of driver is yours the following information will help you decide which driver is most suited to your workstation The print drivers available for your device are PostScript PCL PCL6 and PPD e PostScript gives you greater ability to scale and manipulate images it offers more precision with high end graphics PostScript also provides you with different types of error handling and font substitution options e PCL Printer Command Language generally has fewer advanced features than PostScript However using PCL enables you to process most jobs faster e PPD Driver a PostScript Printer Description PPD file which is a readable text file that provides a uniform approach to specifying special features for print drivers that interpret PostScript Xerox provides PostScript PPDs for use with generic Windows XP Server 2003 Vista PostScript print drivers 150 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Print Introduction You also have the option of using the Global Print Driver or the Mobile Express Driver e Global Print Driver this driver is available for PS PCL or PCL6 printer description languages the same as the device specific drivers mentioned above This GPD manages Xerox and non Xerox printers on your network with a single easy to use interface It simplifies enterprise printer management making it easy to add and update pr
114. aced into a folder located on the device and can be accessed and retrieved for printing at later date Jobs can be recalled and printed as many times as you need 1 To select the Reprint Saved Jobs service press the Services Home button 2 Select the Reprint Saved Jobs option Additional options and features are displayed Most feature screens include the following buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen For instructions on using the basic Reprint Saved Jobs features refer to Reprinting Saved Jobs on page 192 If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features Refer to Log In Out on page 32 of Getting Started 188 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Save and Reprint Jobs Saving a Job Saving a Job Prior to using the Reprint Saved Jobs option a job must be saved to a folder on the device Jobs can be saved using the Copy service at the device or at your PC using the print driver or Internet Services Using the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 To store a job using the device Press the Services Home button Select the Copy o
115. al document are scanned Documents must first be loaded in the document feeder to enable the 2 Sided option The options are e 1 Sided is used if your originals are single sided e 2 Sided is used if your originals are double sided The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 select if your original is double sided and opens up like a calendar WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 75 Fax Fax Original Type Use this option to define the type of original being used for scanning Making the correct selection enhances the quality of your output image The options are e Photo amp Text is recommended for originals containing high quality photographs or line art and text Using this setting the scanned image will contain high quality pictures though the sharpness of text and line art is slightly reduced e Photo is used specifically for originals containing photos or continuous tones without any text or line art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art e Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art This option requires less communication time e Halftone Photo is used if your original is from a magazine or newspaper that contains photographs or text Resolution The Resolution affects the appearance of the fax at the receiving fax terminal A higher resolution produces a better quality image A lower reso
116. al telecommunications company The device must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this device or device malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the device Users should make sure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe systems if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas A CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalent Numbers of all of the devices does not exceed 5 For the Canadian REN value please see the label on the device Europe Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive The Fac
117. and features are displayed Most feature screens include the following buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen If an option is not required use the Off option to disable a feature Sending a Server Fax 1 Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder 2 Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections 3 Press the Services Home button and select the Server Fax option The Server Fax features are displayed 4 Enter the recipient s fax number by e Keypad Dial select the Enter Number area on the touch screen and enter the number using the numeric keypad e Fax Directory Touch the Fax Directory button select an entry from the Fax Directory to add to the Recipient list 5 Select Add to add the number to the Recipient list 92 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Server Fax 6 Select the required features for your fax job using the touch screen
118. and printing depending on the selection WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 1 Save and Reprint Jobs 1 2 Reprinting Saved Jobs Reprinting Saved Jobs Saved Jobs can be reprinted using the device touch screen or from Internet Services Using the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5 765 5775 5790 1 Press the Services Home button 2 Select the Reprint Saved Jobs option Folders containing the saved jobs are displayed 3 Select the folder required If necessary use the scroll bar to access all the folders A list of the jobs in the folder is displayed 4 Select the job and select the print or save option required e Print is used to print the selected job using the currently saved print settings gt If print settings are changed from those stored with the original print job Print and Save is used to print and then store the selected job with the new settings e Save is used to save the selected job without printing The job will be saved in place of the original job with any new settings selected If the job settings require changing prior to printing rane the job select the Settings option Select the options m sawa Printing required and then select Print Print and Save or Save F 5 5 If the job is a secure job log in to the machine or enter o gt ap the passcode required and select Print Job E 6 Select Job Status to view all the job lists and check the status of your job For fu
119. aper and Media Table of Contents Introduction 00 000s Trays 1 and 2 000 Loading Trays 1and2 Trays 3 and 4 5 oh sdcesesesesenseess Loading Trays 3 and 4 Bypass 16 1 777774 Loading the Bypass Tray Loading Tray5 Tray 6 15676 Loading Tray 6 Inserter Media Types Storage and Handling Introduction Introduction This guide describes the different types of media that can be used in your device the paper trays available and the types and sizes of media that can be loaded and fed from each tray It also identifies the orientation the media can be loaded Long Edge Feed LEF or Short Edge Feed SEF Detailed media specifications for this device are provided at www xerox com Paper Tray 1 This tray is standard on the device It Tray 5 An optional high capacity paper source which feeds A4 or 8 5x11 Long Edge Feed LEF media as standard Optional kits are available to accommodate 11x17 A3 8 5x14 8 5x11 or A4 Short Edge Feed SEF media The capacity for this tray is 4000 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper A4 or 8 5x11 LEF up to 2000 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper optional kits Tray 6 Post Process Inserter An optional paper tray for use with the High Volume Finisher It is used to insert pre printed sheets into copy sets The device cannot print on sheets fed from this tray The capacity for this t
120. aper of varied sizes into the tray e If feed problems occur fan the media or shuffle labels before loading WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 291 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting A variety of situations can affect the quality of your output For optimal performance ensure the following guidelines are followed gt Do not position the device in direct sunlight or near a heat source such as a radiator e Avoid sudden changes in the environment surrounding the device When a change occurs allow the device at least two hours to adjust to its new environment depending on the extent of the change e Follow routine maintenance schedules for cleaning areas such as the document glass and touch screen e Always set the edge guides in the paper trays to the size of the media in the tray and ensure the screen is displaying the correct size gt Ensure paper clips and paper debris do not contaminate the device Defining the Problem This section contains problem solving procedures to help you locate and resolve a problem Some problems can be resolved by rebooting your device Refer to General Care on page 288 for instructions about power procedures If rebooting the device does not resolve the problem use the instructions contained in this section to identify and solve the problem If you still cannot fix the problem contact the Xerox Support Center for advice Faults There ar
121. aphics It produces average image quality for photos and graphics e 600 dpi recommended for high quality photos and graphics It produces the largest image file size but delivers the best image quality Select Save to save your selections and exit 128 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning Advanced Settings Quality File Size The Quality File Size settings allow you to choose between scan image quality and file size These settings S allow you to deliver the highest quality or make smaller eae me files A small file size delivers slightly reduced image quality but is better when sharing the file over a network A larger file size delivers improved image quality but requires more time when transmitting over the network The options are E Quality File Sane e Normal Small produces small files by using advanced compression techniques Image quality is acceptable but some quality degradation and character substitution errors may occur with some originals e Higher Larger produces larger files with better image quality e Highest Largest produces the largest files with the maximum image quality Large files are not ideal for sharing and transmitting over the network Select Save to save your selections and exit Note If you change the Quality File Size option you may affect the settings in the Scan Presets options on the Workflow Scanning tab Update Templates The
122. are installed on your device only one of these services can be active at a time Each service remains on the device but one is enabled and one is disabled 70 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax Overview Internet Fax Internet Fax enables the creation of an electronic image file by scanning an original hard copy document The scanned image is converted into E mail format to transmit over the internet or intranet Recipients are selected from an address book or entered manually using the keyboard Received Internet Faxes are automatically sent from the server to the device as print jobs For instructions on using the Internet Fax service features refer to Internet Fax on page 100 Fax from PC The Fax from PC service on the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Print Driver enables you to send a fax to any fax machine over the telephone network from your 9 PC or workstation The great advantage of this feature is that you do not have to print your document before you send it as a fax and you can accomplish the complete task without leaving your workstation The 2 requirements for this option are e Aconnected printer configuration e Fax must be enabled on the device For instructions on using the Fax from PC service features refer to Fax from PC on page 109 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 71 Fax Fax Fax If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled o
123. arious tabs that contain options and properties nna Paper Output Special Pages Image Options Layout Watermark Advanced Type E 2 Sided Printing e Use the Paper Output tab to choose the type of media size and color and output choices such as 2 sided prints Normal Print 1 Sided Print gt The Special Pages tab allows you to add covers inserts and exceptions gt The Image Options tab enables you to adjust the image quality e The Layout Watermark tab has various options to add watermarks to pages change image orientation landscape or portrait and enable booklet and multi up printing e The Advanced tab contains various font document and printing options Choose the options required for your printing job and click OK to print the document 4 The print job will be sent to the device and will appear in the Active Jobs list To view the list at the device press the Job Status button on the control panel Note If the Hold All Jobs feature is enabled by the System Administrator print jobs sent to the machine will be listed in either the Held Jobs or the Unidentified Held Jobs list See Held Jobs on page 242 of Machine and Job Status If your job is held in the list it requires additional resources or a user login or passcode to print To identify the resources required select the job and select Required Resources Once the resources are available the job will print If a user log in or passcode is r
124. as the watermark The picture can be in Bitmap GIF or JPG format Specify the file name in the File Name field or select the Choose File button to browse to the picture that you want to use e Font if you selected Text or Time Stamp select this option to access the Font screen to change the font family style and size to use for the text e Angle if you selected Text or Time Stamp either specify an angle or move the slider to select the angle of the text on the page The default angle is 45 degrees e Scale if you selected Picture either specify the percentage or move the slider to select the percentage to scale the picture e Density either specify a density for the watermark or move the slider to select the density The default density is 25 percent e Use Position from center to select the number of inches or millimeters to shift the watermark from the center of the page or select the Center option to center the watermark e Preview Options selects the paper size and orientation to use for the preview image of the watermark Use the Edit option to change an existing watermark To delete the selected watermark select Delete from the drop down menu Note Not all applications support watermark printing WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 165 Print Advanced Advanced The Advanced tab enables you to select advanced printing options that are rarely changed Paper Output Special Pages Image Options
125. ate and time stamp to the filename e Login Name or Login Credentials are used to enter any login details the device requires to access the file destination 5 Select the Add button to create the template The new template name is added to the list on the left of the screen The new template is populated with the same settings as the Default template You can now modify the settings as required Modifying a Template Existing templates can be modified using Internet Services 1 To modify a template select the Internet Services Scan option 2 Select the required template from the list on the left of the screen The template settings are displayed Refer to Template Options on page 137 for information about the available settings 3 Select Edit to change the options required 4 Select Save to save the selections and exit 136 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning Creating Templates Copying a Template A template can be copied and used as a base for a new template using Internet Services To copy a template select the Internet Services Scan option Select the required template from the list on the left of the screen Select the Copy button Enter the new template name and the template description and owner if required If the name is not changed Copy is appended to the template name Select Add An exact copy of the original template is displayed w
126. aved Jobs Reprinting Saved Jobs 1 Press the Services Home button 2 Select the Reprint Saved Jobs option Folders containing the saved jobs are displayed 3 Select the folder required If necessary use the scroll bar to access all the folders A list of the jobs in the folder is displayed 4 Select the job and select the print or save option required e Print is used to print the selected job using the currently saved print settings gt If print settings are changed from those stored with the original print job Print and Save is used to print and then store the selected job with the new settings e Save is used to save the selected job without printing The job will be saved in place of the original job with any new settings selected If the job settings require changing prior to printing rae the job select the Settings option Select the options m sawa Printing required and then select Print Print and Save or Save 4 5 5 If the job is a secure job log in to the machine or enter Ooms Oe the passcode required and select Print Job le le 1 Ad Plain wp 1 Sided f 2 4 Plain 2 Sided 6 Select Job Status to view all the job lists and check the status of your job For further information refer to Job 7 Y Status on page 241 of Machine and Job Status Jobs can also be reprinted using Internet Services For additional information about Reprint Saved Jobs features refer to Reprinting Save
127. ay and up to 1000 sheets in the Stacker Tray Paper weight 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 57 lb The Stacker can collate stack and staple your output depending on the features selected It staples between 2 and 30 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb paper less if using heavyweight paper or tabs The staple cartridge for the Basic Office Finisher contains 3000 staples Note Double Staple is not available with the Basic Office Finisher Office Finisher Holds up to 250 sheets of paper in the Top Tray and up to 2000 sheets in the Stacker Tray Paper weight 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 57 lb The Office Finisher can collate stack staple and hole punch if available your output depending on the features selected It staples between 2 and 50 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb paper less if using heavyweight paper or tabs The finisher stapler has 1 staple cartridge containing 5000 staples This finisher can be fitted with the optional 2 3 or 4 Hole Punch kit High Volume Finisher Holds up to 250 sheets of paper in the Top Tray and up to 3000 sheets in the Stacker Tray Paper weight 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 57 lb The High Volume Finisher can collate stack staple and hole punch if available your output depending on the features selected It staples between 2 and 100 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb paper less if using heavyweight paper or tabs Use the Pause button on the top of the finisher to pause printing and unload the output tray Press the button again to resume Th
128. ayed Most feature screens include the following buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen If an option is not required use the Off option to disable a feature If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features Refer to Log In Out on page 32 of Getting Started 200 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 ID Card Copy ID Card Copy ID Card Copy The ID Card Copy tab includes Paper Supply and Reduce Enlarge options Each option is described in detail below Reduce Enlarge Reduce or enlarge the size of the ID Card copy by setting the percentage or by selecting one of the reduction enlargement presets Paper Supply Use the Paper Supply options to select the paper tray for the job The options are e Tray 1 use this option to select the paper loaded in Tray 1 gt Tray 2 use this option to select the paper loaded in Tray 2 e Tray 3 use this option to select the paper loaded in Tray 3 gt Tray 4 use this option to select the paper loaded in Tray 4 e Bypass use this option when feeding individual types of media e More provides access to al
129. c keypad to enter a starting page number Leading zeros may be entered to set the starting page number length for example 000000001 4 Select the Prefix option and use the keyboard to enter a prefix Up to eight alphanumeric characters can be entered Select Save to close the keyboard 5 Select Save to store your selections and return to the Annotations screen Program additional Annotations as required 6 Program the Format options required for your Annotations Refer to Format and Style on page 61 for instructions 7 Select Save to confirm your selections 8 Load your originals into the document feeder and select Start to run the job 60 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Output Format Format and Style To specify the orientation style and printing requirements for the selected annotations select the Format option TESE e Orientation use to specify if the annotation is printed f Portrait or Landscape gt e Font Size use the buttons to select a font size for the annotation or select the entry box and enter the size required using the numeric keypad e Appearance is used to specify if the annotated text is Opaque or Transparent Opaque text is placed on top of the copy output and no image is visible under the annotated text Transparent text allows the copy image to remain visible under the annotated text e Side 2 options are used to specify the printing requirements if t
130. can to Mailbox will store the image on the device hard disk and the user can retrieve the files using Internet Services For further information refer to Scan to Mailbox on page 142 gt Scan to Home allows the user to send the files to a location on the network specified as their Home destination For further information refer to Scan to Home on page 145 Workflow Scanning is set up by a System Administrator using Internet Services Users can use Internet Services to create templates and folders once the relevant scanning function has been set up and enabled Repositories Repositories are directories or filing locations setup on a server where your scanned files are saved to and held The Repositories are set up using Internet Services Before you can use Workflow Scanning your System Administrator must set up the repositories available to your device Selecting a template identifies the repository location your scanned job is filed to Repositories are validated by Internet Services when defined by the System Administrator as a scanning destination Up to 5 Repositories 1 default and 4 additional can be defined After the Repositories are setup they are available to you as choices when modifying templates Templates Templates are used for scanning and faxing jobs at your device via the Workflow Scanning service They define the parameters of your scan or fax job Information such as the final destination of your job the repository a
131. ce Enlarge Presets option to access the following settings gt Reduce Enlarge Presets on page 265 e Copy Presets on page 265 e ID Card Copy Presets on page 265 Reduce Enlarge Presets Use to set the 6 reduction or enlargement ratios that are displayed when you select More on the Reduce Enlarge panel of the Copy screen e Normal these ratios produce a proportional reduction or enlargement of the image To change one of the preset ratios select the appropriate preset window and use the numeric keypad to type in the required value gt Custom enables the user to reduce or enlarge the image disproportionately that is with a different ratio for the X and Y axis To change a setting select the required axis window X or Y and use the numeric keypad to type in the required value Copy Presets When the Copy Presets window opens 2 lists each containing the 6 Reduce Enlarge presets are displayed The current Reduce Enlarge presets that are displayed on the basic copying screen are highlighted If you want different preset ratios displayed select your preferred ratio in each list ID Card Copy Presets When the ID Card Copy Presets window opens the 4 Reduce Enlarge presets are displayed The current Reduce Enlarge presets that are displayed on the ID Card Copy screen are highlighted If you want different preset ratios displayed select your preferred ratio in each list WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 265 Administration an
132. ce the device has rebooted the display will return to the default screen e Application Checksum Verification checks that the software used in the user interface is not corrupt Corrupt software may result in the user interface operating incorrectly To run each test select Start Test and follow the instructions provided on the screen 282 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Troubleshooting Image Quality Test Patterns This feature enables you to print test prints that will help you and the Xerox Support Center diagnose image quality problems Each test pattern checks parts of the printing process There are 19 test patterns resident in the device memory that are used to test the functionality of the printing system Select 1 Sided or 2 Sided for the test pattern Select the Stock Size required for the test pattern Select the up down buttons to select the required test pattern Select the Start Test button to start the test The appropriate test pattern is submitted to the print queue I Echo test The Echo Test allows you to test the network connectivity 1 Select the appropriate protocol for the Echo Test e TCP IP e Novell R or IPX e NetBIOS NetBEUI e AppleTalk 2 Select the Start Test button to run the Echo Test Network Connectivity Test The Network Connectivity Test collects network connectivity data and displays the results on the screen 1 Sel
133. ckspace key or to clear the entire entry select the button gt Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards If an address book has been setup enter the name required and select Search A list of matching names is displayed Select the E mail address required and select Save 2 If required select Save to save your selections and exit The E mail address entered is displayed in the Reply To field 102 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Internet Fax From To enter or edit the sender s name 1 Select From 2 Ifa default name is displayed select the X button to delete the entry 3 Using the keyboard enter the E mail address of the sender e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered e To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the X button gt Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards If an address book has been setup enter the name required and select Search A list of matching names is displayed Select the E mail address required and select Save 4 If required select Save to save and return to the previous screen or Cancel to exit The E mail address entered is displayed in the From field Subject To enter a subject for the internet fax 1 Select the Subject field 2 Using the keyboard enter the subject of the internet fax e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be
134. coming faxes on 2 hole punched media if enabled e Duplex prints all incoming faxes 2 sided if enabled Advanced Capabilities This feature allows the device to use the full capabilities of the fax card to improve document transmission speed and resolution Note Enabling this option may prevent faxes being received from older fax machines e Disable switches off the option e Enable switches on the option File Management Use the File Management options to identify how long fax documents will be held on the device and setup Mailboxes Mailbox amp Polling Policies Use this option to specify how long the system keeps documents received or stored in mailboxes before deleting e Documents Received in Mailbox is used to specify the policy for documents received from remote machines e Delete On Print deletes the document after printing e Keep 1 72 Hours allows you to specify between 1 and 72 hours before deleting the document e Keep Forever keeps the document until manually deleted A confirmation screen is displayed as this can cause the memory to become full very quickly e Documents Stored for Polling is used to specify the policy for documents stored in the device for polling e Delete On Poll deletes the document after it has been polled e Keep 1 72 Hours allows you to specify between 1 and 72 hours before deleting the document e Keep Forever keeps the document until manually deleted A confirmation screen is d
135. creen programing selections 3 Press the Services Home button and select the Server T Fax option The Server Fax features are displayed 6 Cl maing Gwea 4 Enter the recipients fax number by e Keypad Dial select the Enter Number area on the touch screen and enter the number using the numeric keypad Original Type e Fax Directory Touch the Fax Directory button ssi Pres amp Ton select an entry from the Fax Directory to add to the Recipient list 5 Select Add to add the number to the Recipient list 6 Select the required features for your fax job using the touch screen Dialing Characters are alphanumeric characters which have a specific fax function and can be 3 entered as part of the fax number 2 Sided Scanning is used to select whether your originals are 1 sided or 2 sided Original Type is used to define the original document as text text and photo or photo Resolution can be used to optimize the resolution settings 7 Press Start to scan the originals and process the Server Fax job Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed Note The Server Fax job enters the job list ready for sending 8 Select Job Status to view the job list and check the status of your job For information about additional Server Fax features refer to Sending a Server Fax on page 92 of Fax 24 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getti
136. ct Print Documentation Most answers to your questions will be provided by the documentation that is supplied with the device e User Guide the user guide is divided into several sections and provides instructions and information about all the features on the device e How To Sheets the how to sheets overview all the basic functions of the device and can be printed and displayed next to your device e System Administrator Guide provides detailed instructions and information about connecting your device to the network and installing optional features The user documentation can be accessed and printed at the device as described above Other documents are either provided on disc or can be downloaded from the Xerox website Faults Faults on the device can be accessed at the device The screen displays fault listings and the device error logs The fault page is separated into three options e gt All Faults e Active Messages e Event Log To access the Faults page Press the Machine Status button touch Faults and select the required option WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 37 Getting Started Help On the Print Driver Click on the print driver screen or press F1 on the PC keyboard for information on the displayed print driver screen On Internet Services To access Internet Services open the web browser from your workstation In the URL field enter http followed by the IP Address of the dev
137. ct Save to confirm the selections 5 Load your originals into the document feeder and select Start to run the job For instructions on loading transparencies into the paper tray refer to Media Types on page 233 of Paper and Media WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 61 Copy Output Format Page Layout The Page Layout feature is ideal for handouts story boards or for archival purposes It allows up to 36 images to fit onto one sheet of paper Your device will reduce or enlarge the images as needed to display them either in landscape or portrait orientation on one page based on the paper supply selected The options are Note Some features cannot be used with the Page Layout feature and will be grayed out on the touch screen The examples shown here are typical outputs that can be produced when using 4 the Page Layout feature Note The practical limit is for 16 aia images on A4 8 5x11 paper 1 2 4 Originals using 2 6 Originals using 3 2 Originals using 2 rows and 2 columns rows and 2 rows and 1 column columns 1 Select the tray that contains the paper you want to use Note Page Layout is not available if Auto Paper is selected H Page Layout 2 Select the Page Layout button on the Output Format tab 3 Select the Pages per Side to enable the Page Layout option 4 Select the Orientation of Images Upright for portrait images or Sideways for landscape images 5 Enter the numb
138. ct the Mailbox Passcode entry field and enter the 4 digit mailbox passcode 4 Select Start to delete the contents of the mailbox Note The storage time for faxes is set up by the System Administrator A confirmation screen is displayed prior to deleting the faxes stored in the selected mailbox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 87 Fax Fax Polling Using the Polling function documents stored on a remote fax machine can be retrieved and printed on your device Alternatively documents stored on your device can be EE ene AASE eee nT be held and retrieved by remote machines polled by a remote fax machine Polling is a useful way of constantly providing access to updated information without having to re distribute it Poll Remote Fao Use to retrieve a document stor gd on a remote machine You may poll a singin machine of soworal machines as ome job Pall Remote Mapes Use to rete a document stoned within a priate Max on a remote machine one malas may be Polled a time and is password musi be krim Local Polling The Local Polling feature allows a fax document to be left in the memory of your device to be retrieved by another fax machine If the fax document is in memory it may be polled once and deleted or polled several times depending on the Mailbox amp Polling Policies set Select the Local Polling button and then On to enable Local Polling The options are e Secure Pol
139. cts the waste punched paper Your device will prompt you when the hole punch waste container needs emptying 1 Open the finisher door and locate the hole punch waste container 2 Slide the hole punch waste container out of the finisher Dispose of the waste punched paper in the waste bin 3 Install the emptied hole punch waste container ensuring that the container is inserted correctly WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 289 General Care and Troubleshooting General Care Cleaning the Device A WARNING When cleaning the device do NOT use organic or strong chemical solvents or aerosol cleaners Do NOT pour fluids directly onto any area Use supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in this documentation Keep all cleaning materials out of the reach of children A WARNING Do not use pressurized air spray cleaning aids on or in this equipment Some pressurized air spray containers contain explosive mixtures and are not suitable for use in electrical applications Use of such cleaners can result in a risk of explosion and fire Document Glass and Constant Velocity Transport Glass To ensure optimum print quality at all times regularly clean the glass areas of your device This helps avoid output with streaks smears and other marks that may transfer from the glass area when scanning documents When you use the document feeder your documents will pass over the stationary scanner using the Constant Velocity Transp
140. d Use the Dialing Characters button to enter the number if special characters are required Refer to Dialing Characters on page 74 for further information Select a Starting Rate for the recipient Use the drop down menu to select a speed for the option selected Refer to Starting Rate on page 84 for further information Select Cover Letter and select On to include a covering note for the recipient Complete the details required refer to Cover Letter on page 76 for further information Select the Save button The new entry is displayed in the list To amend an entry select the entry and use the Edit Details option WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 79 Fax 1 2 Fax Groups Group entries allow you to group individual entries under one number for regularly used broadcast transmissions When transmitting a fax you only have to enter the one group number to send to multiple destinations Fax numbers can only be added to a group if they are entered as an individual entry 1 To add a Group entry select the Fax tab and the Address Book button Select the Groups option from the drop down menu 3 Select an empty slot from the list of entries If necessary use the scroll bar 4 Select the Group Name field and enter the name of the Group using the keyboard To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the X button Select Save 5 Select the Add Recipients butt
141. d Accounting Service Settings Fax Settings Select the Fax Settings option to access the following settings gt Fax Transmission Defaults on page 266 gt Fax Country Setting on page 267 e Incoming Fax Defaults on page 268 e File Management page 269 e Line Setup on page 270 e Fax Report Options on page 271 Fax Transmission Defaults Use these options to set the fax sending defaults Automatic Redial Setup If the device cannot make contact with the destination fax machine it automatically waits and redials later Use this setting to specify the interval between unsuccessful attempts and the number of times the device redials e Redial Time Interval is used to specify the time interval between redials for a failed transmission Between 1 and 25 minutes can be entered e Automatic Redial Attempts instructs the device how many times to redial the remote fax machine before rejecting the job Between 0 and 14 attempts can be entered Automatic Resend If the device connects to the receiving fax machine but the fax transmission is unsuccessful the device automatically attempts to resend the fax Use this setting to specify how may attempts should be made to resend the fax and which pages should be resent e Number of Resends is used to specify how many times the fax is resent Between 0 and 5 can be selected e Failed page s without a Cover Page is selected to resend the failed pages but not the cover page again
142. d Jobs on page 192 of Save and Reprint Jobs WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 31 Getting Started Log In Out Log In Out If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on the device you may need to log in before using some or all of the services A picture of a lock on a button indicates that you must log in to use that service To log in select the Log In Out button on the control panel Selecting a locked service will also prompt you to enter a log in name and password Use the keyboard to enter your User Name If a password is required select the Next button and use the keyboard to enter your Password Select the Enter button If an accounting system is in use on the device you may also need to enter additional information for example a User ID or Account ID If a Foreign Device Interface FDI is installed you are prompted to access via the device installed for example a card reader or coin slot Your user details display in the User Details area on the right side of the message display To log out select the Log In Out button again or select the User Details area and select Log Out from the drop down menu A confirmation screen is displayed select Log Out or Cancel WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started 1 32 Enhance Productivity Enhance Productivity Your device is a powerful multi functional device with many digital functions integrated into one
143. d Separators using the See ae Separator Options drop down menu e Select the Separator Color Note This feature will add a separator between each transparency These settings will only apply when the paper type is set to Transparency pea WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 155 Print Paper Output 2 Sided Printing You can have your job automatically printed on both sides of a sheet of paper e 1 Sided Print prints on one side of the paper or transparency Use this option when printing on transparencies envelopes or labels e 2 Sided Print prints on both sides of a sheet of paper The images are printed so the job can be bound on the long edge of the sheet e 2 Sided Print Flip on Short Edge prints on both sides of a sheet of paper The images are printed so the job can be bound on the short edge of the sheet Note Some media types sizes and weights cannot be automatically printed on both sides Refer to www xerox com for specifications information Finishing Use to select the finishing options for the print job such as stapling or hole punching To change the finishing options select the button to the right of the summary to display the finishing selection drop down menu Stapling e Select the number or location of staples required to staple each set e Select No Staples to switch off stapling Note The stapling options vary depending on the type of finisher Hole Punching e Select Ho
144. d Speed to e Super G3 33 6 Kbps uses the fastest fax transmission rates G and is the default option Determines the transmission rate to be used based on the maximum capabilities of the receiving fax machine This rate minimizes transmission errors by using Error Correction Mode ECM Initial transmission speed is 33 600 Bits Per Second bps e G3 14 4 Kbps uses the standard Group 3 fax transmission rates These are used in fax environments where there is existing noise or stress on the phone network which prevents higher speed fax transmissions working well Selects the transmission rate based on the maximum capabilities of the receiving fax machine Initial transmission speed is 14 400 Bits Per Second bps This rate minimizes transmission errors by using Error Correction Mode ECM e Forced 4800 bps is used in areas of low quality communication when experiencing telephone noise or when fax connections are susceptible to errors Forced 4800 bps is a slower transmission rate but is less susceptible to errors In some regional areas the use of Forced 4800 bps is restricted Fax Resolution You can choose one of 3 image resolutions depending on the type of documents being sent The higher the resolution you choose the better the received image will be but it will take longer to transmit The options are e Standard 200 x 100 dpi is recommended for text originals It requires less communication time but does not produce the be
145. d Suppression feature off particularly when gt The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals e The original has a gray or colored border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 97 Fax Server Fax Contrast The Contrast feature controls the image density on the output and compensates for an original that has too much or too little contrast on the image e Select Manual Contrast to set the level of contrast yourself Move the indicator towards the High setting to reproduce more vivid blacks and whites for sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures Move the indicator towards the Low setting to reproduce more detail in light and dark areas of the original Select Save to save your selections and exit Layout Adjustment The Layout Adjustment options allow you to specify the original size or mixed size originals for scanning To access the Layout Adjustment options select Services Home and Server Fax Then select the Layout Adjustment tab Original Size Select Original Size to enter the size of your document when scanning from the document glass or the document feeder Your device uses this information to calculate the size of your original and the scanned image You can also select Auto Detect for automatic size detection or Mixed Size Originals if
146. d other negotiable instruments This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy In case of doubt contact your legal counsel WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 313 Safety and Regulations Fax Regulations Fax Regulations United States Fax Send Header Requirements The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including a fax machine to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges In order to program this information into your machine refer to the customer documentation and follow the steps provided Data Coupler Information This device complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the cover of this device is a label that contains among other information a device identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to t
147. dd a Group entry to the list select the Individuals drop down menu and select Groups The available Groups are displayed 2 Touch the column headings to sort the entries into ascending order Touch the heading again to sort into P descending order i a 3 To search for Recipients touch the Search button Touch the drop down menu to choose to search for Individuals or Groups and enter the search term using the touch screen keyboard 4 Touch Search The search results are displayed 5 Select the required recipient and select Add to Recipients from the drop down menu The number is added to the Recipient list Continue adding recipients as required WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 7 Fax Fax 6 To edit an existing entry in the address book select the entry from the list and select the Edit Details button Edit the entry as required and select Save 7 To clear an entry from the list select the entry requiring deletion and select Clear Entry from the drop down menu A confirmation screen is displayed select Clear Entry 8 Select Close to return to the fax options screen The fax will be sent to all the numbers in the Recipient list Using Chain Dial The Chain Dial feature allows you to create a single fax recipient by adding 2 or more fax numbers together For example an area code may be stored separately to the telephone numb
148. ded for devices which are accessed by the general public and enables the user to be charged for the copies 1 Select Copy Activity Report 2 Select Enable to have the device print a report at the end of each copy session Alternatively select Disable to turn this feature off 280 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Security Settings Security Settings The Security Settings are used to manage the security features of the device Image Overwrite Settings can be configured Detailed instructions for Security Settings are provided in the System Administrator Guide On Demand Image Overwrite If you have sent print jobs to the device that are confidential or sensitive you can delete any data that is stored on the hard disk after the job has been printed This is done using the On Demand Overwrite option There are two types of Overwrite available Standard or Full Standard Overwrite takes approximately 20 minutes and excludes e Print file directories gt Scan to mailbox jobs e Fax dial directories e Mailbox contents A Full Overwrite takes approximately 60 minutes and includes all data Select the Overwrite option required and select Start Image Overwrite to run the overwrite process WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 281 Administration and Accounting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting These settings are used to troubleshoot any problems that maybe occurrin
149. density on the output and compensates for an original that has too much or too little contrast on the image e Move the indicator up to reproduce more vivid blacks and whites for sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures e Move the indicator down to reproduce more detail in light and dark areas of the original Select Save to save your selections and exit Resolution The Resolution affects the appearance of the scanned C Resolution image A higher resolution produces a better quality image aretet A lower resolution reduces communication time when EF Soo Fee aii ero ie sina sending the file over the network The options are P aaas o Ben et rc cro vi yk Ba acceptable e 72 dpi recommended for output displayed on a Ow o computer It produces the smallest file size 8 e 100 dpi recommended for output that delivers low quality text documents e 150 dpi recommended for average quality text documents and line art Does not produce the best image quality for photos and graphics e 200 dpi recommended for average quality text documents and line art Does not produce the best image quality for photos and graphics e 300 dpi recommended for high quality text documents that are to pass through OCR applications Also recommended for high quality line art or medium quality photos and graphics This is the default resolution and the best choice in most cases e 400 dpi recommended for photos and gr
150. der You can modify or delete existing folders that contain Saved Jobs using Internet Services Open the web browser from your Workstation In the URL field enter http followed Bi iT Yew Fyri ook He by the IP Address of the device For example If the IP Address is S 192 168 100 100 enter the following into the URL field http 192 168 100 100 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP Address of your device print a configuration report For instructions refer to Print Reports on page 245 of Machine and Job Status Select the Jobs option Select Saved Jobs tab to access the folder options Select Manage Folders The window displays all the Public folders and any Private folders belonging to you Check the box next to the folder you want to modify WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 195 Save and Reprint Jobs 1 2 Managing Folders 7 Select options required for the folder The folder can be deleted by selecting the Delete Folder button The folder and the contents of the folder are deleted from the list on this screen and the list of available folders at the device 196 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Save and Reprint Jobs Version 2 0 Decem ber 2010 xe OX Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 ID Card Copy 2011 Xerox Co
151. destination 3 Select Save to add the new destination and exit the screen The destination is listed 138 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning Creating Templates Document Management Fields This option enables users to assign et T tt i descriptive data to a scanned job The ee eo descriptive data can be accessed by other software applications to assist in searching indexing and the automated processing of scanned documents Deign meee 1 add afield select Add and enter the data required 2 Select Editable if the user is required to enter data at the time of scanning Select Not Editable to include fixed data 3 Enter a field label and a default value if required If user input is required select Require User Input Select Mask User Input if the data entered is confidential such as a passcode If details of the entry must be added to the log select Record User Input to Job Log 4 Select Apply to save the field entry Workflow Scanning These options are used to set the basic options for a job The options are e Output Color use to automatically detect and match the color of your lons ne 1 Dathan Mea original or produce black and white grayscale or color output from your original Note This feature may not be available on your device e 2 Sided Scanning allows you to set whether 1 or 2 sides of your original document will be scan
152. duce Enlarge 2 Sided Copy Layout Adjustments Image Quality Output Formats Job Assembly and other copy functions k i When Start is pressed from within the copy service the device scans your originals and temporarily stores the images It then prints the images based on the selections made 1 select the Copy service press the Services Home button 2 Select the Copy option Additional options and features are displayed For instructions on using the basic Copy features refer to Making Copies on page 43 If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features Refer to Log In Out on page 32 of Getting Started 42 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Making Copies Making Copies 1 Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to just touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder 2 Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections 3 Press the Services Home button and select the Copy option The Copy features are displayed 4 Select the required features using the touch screen Reduce Enlarge can be used to reduce or enlarge the image by 25 to 400 g 4 Paper Supply is used to select
153. e 122 Filename Duplication 133 Filing Destination 137 Filing Destinations 133 Filing Options 141 Filing Policy 137 Finishers 11 Finishing 156 Finishing Devices 49 Fix Image Quality 284 Folded Booklets 47 Folding 156 Forced 4800 85 114 From 103 174 Further Assistance 37 38 300 Fuser Module 288 G General Care 288 Group Fax Number 80 H Hardware Options 246 Health amp Safety Contact Information 319 Held Jobs 244 Help 10 37 High Volume Finisher 49 History of Faults 37 Hole Punch Waste 34 289 Hole Punched 46 Hole Punching 156 Home Template 145 ID Card Copy 200 Background Suppression 203 If File Already Exists 133 Image Count 210 Image Enhancement 177 Managing Jobs 244 Manual Dialing 73 93 Material Safety Data 317 Measurements Setting 255 Media Storage and Handling 235 Media Types 233 Message 173 Messages 294 Meter Reading 247 Mirror Image 54 Mixed Size Originals 82 130 Modifying Templates 135 Multi Page TIFF 108 132 182 Multiple Images 163 N Naming the File 132 182 Negative Image 54 Network Connectivity Test 283 Network Scanning 27 122 Network Templates 124 New Recipient 101 173 New Templates 135 Number of Prints 247 Numeric Keypad 16 O Off 17 Office Finisher 49 On 17 On Demand Image Overwrite Setting 281 Operational Safety Information 305 Options 11 12 14 100 111 Copy 44 Orientation of Orig
154. e 245 of Machine and Job Status Customer Replaceable Units There are 6 replaceable units on the device e Toner Cartridge R1 e Xerographic Module R2 e Fuser Module R3 e Waste Toner Bottle R4 e Ozone Filter R5 e Document Feeder Feed Roll R6 The device will display a message on the touch screen when any of the units need to be reordered This message is a warning that the unit is nearing the end of its life Only replace the unit when a message actually instructs you to do so To replace a Customer Replaceable Unit follow the instructions on the touch screen or use the instructions provided with the consumable Staple Cartridges and Hole Punch Waste If your device is equipped with a finisher or a convenience stapler you will be required to replace the staple cartridge or cartridges when the device displays a message instructing you to do so If your finisher has the optional hole punch unit you will also be required to empty the hole punch waste container when prompted by the device Cleaning Tasks Performing regular cleaning activities ensures the device is kept free of dust and debris The device covers control panel and touch screen should all be cleaned using a soft lint free cloth lightly dampened with water Xerox Cleaning Fluid or Anti Static Cleaner can be used to clean the document glass but must be applied using a cloth and not poured directly on the document glass Remove any residue with a clean cloth
155. e Punched Jobs select the output location for all hole punched Copy Jobs Fax Jobs Print Jobs and Reports Out of Staples Options If your device has a finisher you can set how the device handles a stapling job when the stapler runs out of staples e Complete Job Without Stapling instructs the device to continue the job without stapling e Fault Hold Job instructs the device to hold the job in the job list for the user If a job has already started and the staples run out a fault is declared Within Job Offsetting The device offsets every set from the previous set making it easier to separate the sets There maybe occasions when you require the job to stack without offsetting Use this feature to enable or disable the offsetting e Enable instructs the device to offset each printed set e Disable instructs the device to stack the sets without offsetting WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 259 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Output Performance This feature enables the Administrator to optimize the performance of the finisher for either speed or improved stacking alignment The feature is only available if your device is fitted with a High Volume Finisher Note This setting does not apply to stapled jobs e Optimum Speed this option produces well stacked jobs at the maximum operating speed of the device e Optimum Stacking with this option selected the output prints will be collated every 10 pages
156. e control panel 4 Use the keyboard to enter your User Name then select the Next button Use the keyboard to enter your Password then select the Enter button 5 Press the Services Home button and select the Workflow Scanning option The Workflow Scanning features are displayed 6 Select the Scan To Home template from the Template Destination list LF TForvaioMadbcaTomolaie D Tarpa WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 5 Workflow Scanning Scan to Home 7 Make programing changes to Output Color if available 2 Sided Scanning Original Type and Scan Presets as required Additional Workflow Scanning options are provided on each of the tabs Refer to the following sections for further information e Advanced Settings on page 127 gt Layout Adjustment on page 0 e Filing Options on page 132 e Job Assembly on page 134 8 Press Start to scan the originals and process the Scan to Home job Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed The job enters the job list ready for filing to the home location specified 9 Select Job Status to view all the job lists and check the status of your job For more information refer to Job Status on page 241 of Machine and Job Status The scanned images are filed to the location specified on the template ready for retrieval by the user 186 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanni
157. e different categories of faults that can occur on your device and different ways in which they are identified depending on the type of fault occurring This section gives an overview of the different types of faults and the way that faults are displayed and recorded Your device has three fault types Hard Down faults User Clearable faults and Status Messages Within each fault type there are subgroups of fault categories relating to the effect the fault has on the device operation The fault display generated for each fault depends on the category of that fault 292 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Hard Down Faults Hard Down faults prevent a subsystem module or component from functioning properly There are three categories of Hard Down faults Low Level Fault this occurs when a subsystem or module is unable to function correctly For example if during a stapler job a fault is detected other features are still functional but the stapler is unavailable Failure Fault this is declared when a low level fault causes a major subsystem to function incorrectly For example if a fault occurs with the Xerographic Module R2 causing the print and copy features to become non functioning Fatal Fault this occurs when a system wide failure exists that is unrecoverable For example a power fault occurs causing the device to be inoperable Customer Clearable Faults A Customer Clea
158. e for differences in air pressure if you input the approximate height of the device above sea level The adjustment can be set in meters or feet Display Options The Book Copying Book Faxing and Booklet Creation features in their default modes assume that the books and booklets have a reading order of left to right In some countries the reading order is from right to left This utility provides additional options for both features to enable the user to select the appropriate reading order e Book Scan Order if set to On the user of the Book Copying or Book Faxing feature will be able to choose to scan both pages of a bound original either left page then right page or right page then left page e Booklet Print Order if set to On the user of the Booklet Creation feature will be able to choose to print the booklet so that the pages can be read from left to right or from right to left WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 261 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Document Feeder Size Sensing The Document Feeder automatically senses the size of the documents being fed from the input tray so that features such as Auto Paper selection can be used It can automatically detect 18 different sizes of document which includes all the standard sizes the user is likely to use This feature enables you to set up the document feeder so that it will detect a different or custom size of document that you may use regularly gt To cu
159. e number on the page 3 Select the Starting Page Number input box and use the numeric keypad to enter the first page number you want printed on your first copy output sheet 4 Select Save to store your selections and return to the Annotations screen Program additional annotations as required 5 Program the Format options required for your Annotations Refer to Format and Style on page 61 for instructions 6 Select Save to confirm your selections 7 Load your originals into the document feeder and select Start to run the job Comment Use the following instructions to add a Comment 1 Select Output Format then Annotations and the Comment button Select the On button Comment 2 Select one of the arrow buttons to determine the L position of the comment on the page C 3 Specify whether you want the comment to appear on All Pages First Page Only or All Pages Except First 4 Use the scroll bar to browse the list of available comments and select the comment you require 5 To add anew comment to the list highlight an empty entry and use the keyboard to enter up to 50 alphanumeric characters To edit an existing comment highlight the comment in the list and select the Edit button Use the keyboard to edit the entry then select Save to close the keyboard 6 Select Save to store your selections and return to the Annotations screen Program additional Annotations as required 7 Program the Format options requ
160. e on the system Line Setup The standard fax option supports one analogue telephone line If the Extended Fax option is installed the device can support two analogue fax lines This option enables you to set up each line e Line Setup is used to select the line being setup e Fax Number is the number of the phone line your system is attached to Enter the number for Line 1 using the numeric keypad e Fax Name isa friendly name to logically identify the system Enter the name using the keyboard provided Use the backspace key to delete an incorrect character or use the X button to delete the entire entry Select Save e Options determine whether the line is able to Send and Receive Send Only or Receive Only Select the required option for the fax line e Dial Type select Tone or Pulse for the dial type e Uninstall Line is used to remove a fax line from the device 270 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Fax Report Options There are 3 fax reports available Activity Report Broadcast and MultiPoll Report and Transmission Report This option enables you to specify the appearance and printing behavior of these reports e Activity Report provide information on the fax activities which have occurred on the device e Auto Print is used to print an Activity automatically e Disable is selected if the Activity Report is not required e Broadcast amp Multipoll Report provides
161. e pages The pages must be the same width like A4 LEF and A3 SEF 8 5x11 LEF and 11x17 SEF other combinations are shown on the screen The device detects the size of the documents and can produce the following output e If Auto Reduce Enlarge and a specific Paper Supply is selected all the images are reduced or enlarged and copied onto the same size paper e If Auto Paper supply is selected the images are copied size for size and a mix of paper sizes will be output Select Save to save your selections and exit Book Copying A CAUTION Do Not close the document feeder when scanning bound originals This feature enables you to specify which page or pages of a book are to be scanned The book original is placed face down on the document glass with the spine of the book lined up with the marker at the centre of the rear edge of the document glass Align the top of the bound original against the rear edge of the document glass 52 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Layout Adjustment The device will identify the size of the original during scanning If the pages have a black or dark colored border the device will assume that the pages are smaller than they really are To overcome this use the Custom Scan Areas feature in Original Size to enter the exact size of the page Refer to Original Size on page 52 for more information Both Pages use to scan both pages the left page of the book will be scanned first Use
162. e printed on the document For copying 2 sided to 2 sided each page of your document has 2 page numbers so you need to count each side of your document If using the optional Tray 6 Inserter each insert counts as 1 page and the page numbers entered for remaining inserts must take this into account Use the Tray 6 Supply option if using the inserter to feed the inserts Use the arrow buttons or select the entry box and use the numeric keypad to enter the page number 7 Select the Paper Supply required for the insert using the Paper Supply 1 or Paper Supply 2 options If a tab insert is required ensure the paper tray containing the tabs is selected For instructions on loading tabs select the Tab Loading Instructions option Ensure the correct tab sequence and number of tabs are loaded for the job If printing on the tabs use the Tab Shift option to enter the amount of shift required to ensure the tab image prints correctly on the tab 8 Select Add Insert to add the insert to the list A summary of the inserts using each paper supply is displayed To delete the last insert entry use the Delete Last Insert option 9 Continue programing the inserts required 10 Select Save to confirm the selections 11 Load your originals into the document feeder and select Start to run the job Annotations The Annotations feature enables you to automatically add a comment page number today s date or Bates Stamp to your copy output You can
163. e the ability of the system to clean itself and can cause defects on the output if used excessively Select Save to save your selections and exit Invert Image Invert Image allows you to reverse the image or create a negative This feature is useful for originals that have a substantial amount of dark background or light text and images saving on toner usage a Invert Image The options are e Mirror Image reverses the original image creating a mirror of the original e Negative Image converts the dark image areas in the original to light and the light image areas to dark Select Save to save your selections and exit 423 1 3 54 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Output Format Output Format The output options allow you to manipulate the copied images and enhance the appearance and style of your copy jobs For example you can add covers or annotations to your copies create booklets combine several images onto one page and interleave transparencies Booklet Creation Booklet Creation enables the production of booklets from 1 or 2 sided originals The device will scan your originals and automatically reduce and arrange the images in the correct sequence on your selected copy paper so that a booklet is created when the copy set is folded in half A cover can be inserted onto the booklet automatically Refer to Covers on page 56 for more information F If your device is fitt
164. e timeout period required 0 20 or 40 seconds e Disable when this option is selected the Tray Information screen will be displayed until the user selects Confirm 256 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Consumables Management Select the Consumables Management option to access the following settings e Service Plan on page 257 gt Feed Roll Replacement on page 257 e Ozone Filter Replacement on page 257 e Xerographic Reordering on page 257 e Fuser Module Replacement on page 257 gt Toner Cartridge Reordering on page 258 Service Plan This option is used to change your Xerox Service Plan To change the plan contact the Xerox Support Center with your machine serial number Xerox will provide you with a Service Plan Authorization Number Enter the number and select the Enter button Feed Roll Replacement This option provides notification of how many days the Document Feeder Feed Roll R6 has until it reaches the end of its life Ozone Filter Replacement The Ozone Filter R5 is a customer replaceable unit This option provides notification of how many days the Ozone Filter R5 has until it reaches the end of its life The Ozone Filter R5 has the same life as the Fuser Module R3 and is supplied with the Fuser Module R3 Always replace the Ozone Filter R5 at the same time as the Fuser Module R3 Xerographic Reordering The Xerographic Module R2 has a
165. ecipient list in this way Select Close to exit 7 Enter the Message Reply To From and Subject details as required 8 Select the required features for your fax job using the touch screen P Output Color is used to replicate the original colors or to change the output to black and white grayscale or color Note This feature may not be available on your device 2 Sided Scanning is used to select whether your originals are 1 sided or 2 sided Original Type is used to define the original document as text text and photo or photo 9 Press Start to scan the originals and process the Internet Fax job Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed Note The Internet Fax job enters the job list ready for sending 10 Select Job Status to view the job list and check the status of your job For information about additional Internet Fax features refer to Sending an Internet Fax on page 100 of Fax WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 25 Getting Started Sending a Fax from the PC Sending a Fax from the PC 1 Ensure that the correct Xerox print driver has been installed on your PC and the Fax from PC option is available To install the print drivers refer to the System Administrator Guide 2 Open the document to be faxed Click File gt Print and select the Xerox device from the list of printers displayed 3 Select the Properties button to display the print dri
166. ecome the default settings for each Fax job e Aconfirmation screen is displayed select Done to return to the previous screen Set Copy Defaults Use to select the default settings for each programing feature within the Copy service such as Paper Supply Copy Output and 2 Sided Copy e Select the default required for each feature in each of the programing tabs e Select End Defaults The settings selected become the default settings for each Copy job e A confirmation screen is displayed select Done to return to the previous screen Set ID Card Copy Defaults Use to select the default settings for each programing feature within the ID Card Copy service such as Paper Supply Image Quality Side 1 and Image Quality Side 2 e Select the default required for each feature e Select End Defaults The settings selected become the default settings for each ID Card Copy job e A confirmation screen is displayed select Done to return to the previous screen WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 263 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Job Sheets Select the Job Sheets option to access the following settings e Banner Sheets on page 264 e Output Error Sheets on page 264 e Scan Status Sheet on page 264 gt Paper Type amp Color on page 264 e Server Fax Status Sheet on page 264 Banner Sheets With this option the device can print a banner sheet with every print job If enabled you can sti
167. ect the appropriate protocol for the Network Connectivity Test e TCP IP e Novell R or IPX e NetBIOS NetBEUI e AppleTalk 2 Select the Start Test button to run the Network Connectivity Test WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 283 Administration and Accounting Troubleshooting Image Quality Adjustment Use this option to print test patterns which are then scanned and used by the device to adjust the image quality settings Ensure 8 5x11 or A4 white paper is loaded and select Print Test Pattern Place the test pattern in the document feeder or on the document glass long edge feed Select the Start Test button to scan the test pattern and start the test The device will scan the test pattern and automatically make any adjustments required If the adjustment is successful select Close to return to Tools If the adjustment is unsuccessful the reasons are provided on the screen Select Close and run the test again 1 Xerox Customer Support Use to enter your Xerox Support and Supplies Telephone numbers which are displayed on the device Customer Support Number is selected to enter the Xerox Support Center number supplied with your device Enter the number using the keyboard and select Save To delete an incorrect character entry use the backspace key or to delete the entire entry select the X button Supplies Number is selected to enter the telephone number you call to obtain supplies for your device Enter the n
168. ed during set up When the user receives a forwarded fax in their E mail it will be either a single E mail or multiple E mails depending upon the size of the job e Fax Forward to a Repository the fax job is forwarded to an SMB file share repository The fax job is stored using the parameters specified by the System Administrator An E mail notification can be set up to notify the user that the fax job has been stored and is ready for retrieval The user then accesses the file server to retrieve the stored forwarded fax document The System Administrator specifies the file format type to use for the fax job the supported types are e Image only PDF e Searchable PDF e Multiple page TIFF e Image only XPS e Searchable XPS The feature can also be set up to print a copy of the fax at the device prior to forwarding If the forwarded fax job fails to reach its destination the device can be set up to print a copy of the received document or notify the user the job has failed WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 117 Fax Receiving a Fax 118 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Version 2 0 Decem ber 2010 xe OX Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission
169. ed on one side and you want 2 sided copies You can also select the Rotate Side 2 button to have the second page rotated by 180 e 2 gt 2sided use this option if you want to make two sided copies from two sided originals You can also select the Rotate Side 2 button to have the second side s rotated by 180 e 2 gt 1 sided this option will make one sided copies from two sided originals Note If using the document glass to scan originals the device displays a message when ready to scan side 2 Continue scanning until all sides have been scanned Copy Output The most commonly used Copy Output options are selected directly from the Copy tab The options available are dependent on the finishing device and kits installed For further information refer to Finishing Devices on page 49 Use More to access all the options When you have finished programing your options select Save to save your selections and exit None This option is selected if no finishing is required for the copy output Collation Select the Collation option required The options are e Collated sorts your copies into sets 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 e Uncollated sorts your copies into stacks 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Stapled The stapling options available are dependent on the finishing device available and the configuration setup For information about the available options refer to Services and Options on page 12 of Getting Started e 1 Staple select this option and th
170. ed to the Recipient list Enter additional numbers as required The fax will be sent to all the numbers in the Recipient list Select the required features for your fax job using the touch screen Dialing Characters are alphanumeric characters which have a specific fax function and can be entered as part of the fax number Cover Letter allows you to send a fax with a covering letter 2 Sided Scanning is used to select whether your originals are 1 sided or 2 sided Original Type is used to define the original document as text text and photo photo or halftone photo Resolution can be used to optimize the resolution settings Press Start to scan the originals and process the fax job Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed Note The Fax job enters the job list ready for sending Select Job Status to view the job list and check the status of your job 8 For information about additional Fax features refer to Sending a Fax on page 72 of Fax WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 23 Getting Started Server Fax Server Fax 1 Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder 2 Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous s
171. ed with the High Volume Finisher with 0 Booklet Maker you can use the Booklet Creation feature to Eb automatically produce folded and stapled booklets The following Booklet Maker specifications apply e Paper Sizes A3 11x17 A4 8 5x11 8 5x13 and 8 5x14 e Paper weight 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 57 lb e All media must be Short Edge Feed SEF e Booklet thickness e For Folded and Stapled booklets a maximum of 15 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb or equivalent thickness For example you can have 13 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb and a cover sheet of 160 gsm 43 lb e For Folded Only booklets a maximum of 5 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb or equivalent thickness For example you can have 3 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb and a cover sheet of 200 gsm 53 lb To create a booklet 1 On the Copy tab select the Paper Supply required for the job If stapling and or folding is required a Short Edge Feed SEF paper supply must be selected Note Booklet Creation is not available if paper Auto Select is active 2 Select the Output Format Tab 3 Touch the Booklet Creation button WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 55 Copy Output Format 4 Select the Reading Order required for the finished output either Left to Right or Right to Left Note This option will not be displayed if it has not been enabled in Tools Refer to Set Copy Defaults on page 263 of Administration and Accounting 5 If the High Volume Finisher with Booklet Mak
172. efine the type of original being used for scanning Making the correct selection enhances the quality of your output image The options are e Photo amp Text is recommended for originals containing high quality photographs or line art and text Using this setting the scanned image will contain high quality pictures though the sharpness of text and line art is slightly reduced gt Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art e Photo is used specifically for originals containing photos or continuous tones without any text or line art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art Address Book If the device has been setup to access the Network and Internal Address Books you can use them to select recipients For information about setting up address books refer to the System Administrator Guide 1 Select New Recipients 2 Enter the name of the recipient and select Search The matching entries are displayed 3 Select the E mail address required The recipient details are displayed to the right of the list 4 Select Add To Add Cc or Add Bcc from the drop down menu The E mail address is added to the recipient list Continue adding E mail addresses as required 5 To search different address books select the Internal Address Book option Select the Address Book required using the drop down menu and search using the same method described 6 Select Recipient L
173. eled revenue stamp this may be done provided the reproduction of the document is performed for lawful purposes Postage Stamps canceled or uncanceled For philatelic purposes Postage Stamps may be photographed provided the reproduction is in black and white and is less than 75 or more than 150 of the linear dimensions of the original Postal Money Orders Bills Checks or Draft of money drawn by or upon authorized officers of the United States Stamps and other representatives of value of whatever denomination which have been or may be issued under any Act of Congress Adjusted Compensation Certificates for Veterans of the World Wars Obligations or Securities of any Foreign Government Bank or Corporation Copyrighted materials unless permission of the copyright owner has been obtained or the reproduction falls within the fair use or library reproduction rights provisions of the copyright law Further information of these provisions may be obtained from the Copyright Office Library of Congress Washington D C 20559 Ask for Circular R21 5 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 1 Safety and Regulations 1 Copy Regulations Certificate of Citizenship or Naturalization Foreign Naturalization Certificates may be photographed Passports Foreign Passports may be photographed Immigration papers Draft Registration Cards Selective Service Induction papers that bear any of the following Registra
174. elocate the receiver e Increase the separation between the device and receiver e Connect the device into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Xerox could void the user s authority to operate the device To ensure compliance with Part 15 of the FCC rules use shielded interface cables Canada Regulations This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme 6 la norme NMB 003 du Canada WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 309 Safety and Regulations Basic Regulations European Union A WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this device may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures The CE mark applied to this device symbolizes Xerox s declaration of conformity with the C 6 following applicable Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated e December 12 2006 Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment e December 15 2004 Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004 108 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to electromagnetic compatibility e March 9 1999 Radio amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment D
175. en and for printing most standard business documents This setting results in a small file size and normal image quality Archival Small File Size is best for standard business documents that are stored electronically for record keeping purposes This setting results in the smallest file sizes and normal image quality Simple Scan is used for faster processing but may result in excessively large file sizes Using this setting applies only minimal image processing and compression OCR is best for documents that are going to be processed by Optical Character Recognition OCR software This setting results in large file sizes and the highest image quality High Quality Printing is best for business documents containing detailed graphics and photos This setting results in large file sizes and the highest image quality More is used to access all the Scan Presets options available If using this option select Save to save your selections and exit WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning 126 Advanced Settings Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings provide access to the features which enhance the image quality or output quality To access the Advanced Settings select Services Home and Workflow Scanning Then select the Advanced Settings tab Image Options Select Image Options to adjust the lightness and darkness of the image and to sharpen the image The options are e Lighten
176. en select the corner required for the staple A single staple will be positioned in the corner selected e 2 Staple select this option and then select the edge C required for the staples Two staples will be positioned O along the edge selected 46 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Copy Options e Multi Staple when this option is selected depending on the size of your media either three or four staples will be positioned on the edge selected For example e 4 Staples A4 LEF A3 8 5x11 LEF 11x17 8x10 LEF e 3 Staples 8x10 SEF 8 5x11 SEF 8 5x5 5 LEF A4 SEF A5 LEF 8 5x14 SEF 5 SEF Note SEF is Short Edge Feed and LEF is Long Edge Feed Note For some staple selections the device will rotate the image If you are unable to staple ensure that Image Rotation is On in Tools Refer to Auto Image Rotation on page 272 of Administration and Accounting Hole Punched Stapled The Hole Punched Stapled options available are dependent on the finishing device and Hole Punch Kit available For information about the available options refer to Services and Options on page 12 of Getting Started This option is selected if you require your output to be hole punched or hole punched and stapled Each sheet will be punched individually so there is no limit to the number of pages in the set Hole punching can only be selected for A4 LEF and A3 8 5x11 LEF and 11x17 paper Select the Colla
177. eneral Accounts General Accounts can only be accessed if the user has login rights The count is updated for the General Account only Use General Accounts to track usage by administrative tasks or customers No limit can be set for General Accounts To create a new General Account select Accounting Settings and Internal Auditron Setup Select Auditron General Accounts Select the Next Open Account button to locate the next unused account number or use the up down arrows to change the account number The number of General Accounts is dependent on the partitioning of the Auditron If there are no General Accounts the General Accounts Access button is grayed out and non selectable If a General Account Number is not unique a message displays Use the Next Open Active Account and Previous Account buttons to browse through the General Accounts The Copy total for the selected General Account displays in the Totals window The maximum copy value is 2 500 000 To set the copy count back to 0 select the Default Account button Select Close to exit ak 2 3 Deactivate a User Account Only the System or Auditron Administrator can deactivate a User Account User Accounts cannot be deleted only deactivated This is done by changing the User Number to an alternative number known only by the Administrator a unique number which can be used specifically for deactivated accounts To deactivate a User Account select Accounting Settings and Inter
178. enlarge the original onto the selected paper size You must specify a paper tray before using this option 44 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Copy Options Independent X Y This selection enables you to set different reduction or enlargement ratios for the X width and the Y length of the image This will produce a distorted copy of your original e Select the Variable X Y buttons 100 and use the N 5 numeric keypad or the arrow buttons to enter the Varin K Presets rr Width X and Length Y ratios required 070 lt i 25 400 agin X mo ee gt Use the Presets X Y buttons to select 100 100 Auto Independent X Y or commonly used ratios which can be set up by your Administrator The selected X and Y ratios in percentages are shown next to the button Use 100 100 to produce an image the same size as your original F Te 00 Auto Independent X Y automatically fits the image of your original onto the paper you have selected The reduction or enlargement may not be proportional the device will distort the image so that it will fit onto the paper You must specify a paper tray before using this option or select Auto Select on the Paper Supply screen Select Save to save your selections and exit Paper Supply On the Paper Supply section of the Copy tab you have the option to select one of the paper trays or Auto Select Use More to
179. entered gt To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the button gt Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards 3 Select Save to save and return to the previous screen or Cancel to exit The subject entered is displayed in the Subject field Output Color Select the Auto Detect option in Output Color to automatically detect and match the color of your original and produce black and white grayscale or color output from your original The options are e Auto Detect to select output that matches your original e Black amp White to select black and white output regardless of the color of your original e Grayscale to use gray scales instead of color e Color to select color output from your original Note This feature may not be available on your device WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 103 Fax Internet Fax 2 Sided Scanning The 2 Sided Scanning option allows you to set whether 1 or 2 sides of your original document are scanned Documents must first be loaded in the document feeder to enable the 2 Sided option The options are e 1 Sided is used if your original documents are single sided e 2 Sided is used if your original documents are double sided The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 select if your original opens up like a calendar Original Type Use this option to d
180. entre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 15 7 Print Paper Output Output Destination e Use this option to select the destination for your output from the tray choices in the drop down menu gt Use Automatically Select to send the printed output to a destination based on the paper size Note If a destination appears in gray text it may not be available due to other settings that you have selected 158 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Print Special Pages Special Pages The Special Pages tab enables you to add modify or delete cover pages inserts or exception pages The table provides a summary of the special pages for your print job Up to 250 inserts and exception pages can be included in the table You can change the width renaz Fases mags Onions Layout Tass Advanced of the columns in the table E Add Exceptions To edit delete or move an entry in the table use the following buttons rint Flip on Long Edge Quantity 1 Yello e Edit you can select single or multiple entries Z 9 Quantity 1 Yellow and use this button to change the properties for Cover Blank or Pre Printed Pirk the selected entries S Delete is used to delete an individual entry or a selection of entries 6 Delete All is used to delete all the entries in the table Undo is used to undo the last actions if you make an error e Up and Down are used to move the
181. epts your selection or when you touch a button on the touch screen Select High Medium Low or Off Use the Test option to hear the tone selected Entry Screen Defaults Selecting Entry Screen Defaults allows you to choose the initial screen that users will see at the device display either the Active or Completed jobs list or change the default language displayed on the touch screen The options are e Entry Screen Default this feature enables the Administrator to set which screen the user sees first Services Job Status or Machine Status e Job Status Default this feature enables the Administrator to set which jobs list is displayed as the default tab when the Job Status button is pressed It also enables the default job list for the Active Jobs Queue and the Completed Jobs Queue to be set e Language Default this feature is used to select the language that is displayed when the device is switched on e Service Default this feature allows the Administrator to select the Service that is displayed as the default service or to select the Services Home screen as the default Use the Promote and Demote buttons to place the services into the order required 254 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Measurements This utility enables you to set the device to display measurements either in millimeters or inches and the numeric separator as a period full stop or a comma e Un
182. equired log into the machine and select Release or select Release and enter the secure passcode 152 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Print Paper Output Paper Output Use the Paper Output tab to select the basic printing requirements for your job Identify the type of job being submitted the paper sides printed finishing ANd rcas specal Fages mage Onions Leyout Watermark Advanced quality requirements g me 2 BE lormal Print Note Some features are only supported by specific L S oT Oy Se Pica Default Type printer configurations operating systems or driver types You may see more features or options listed Output Destination Automatically Select than your specific device supports Job Type Use this option to select the type of job being submitted to the printer Normal Print prints the job immediately without requiring a user log in or passcode Secure Print is used for confidential or sensitive jobs The jobis Epa held at the device until the authenticates by logging on ora ee passcode is entered to release the job for printing Snn Digits When you select this job type the Secure Print screen is Al rn Digit displayed for you to enter a unique passcode eee After submitting the job go to the printer When the job arrives at the printer it is held in the Secure Print gorio panel select the job from the list te thie Jobs Held Jobs or Unidentified Held Jobs list
183. equired is available in the drop down menu e Enter a Scan Destination is selected if you need to enter a new file destination for the scanned images e Enter a Server Fax Number use this option to enter a telephone number if the images are to be sent to a server fax e File Destination select the file destination required from the drop down menu e Friendly Name use to enter an appropriate name for the file destination e Protocol IP Address and Port if entering a new destination for the scanned images select the protocol type and enter the address details e Document Path use to specify a path to the destination selected if required e Filing Policy use this option to determine how the device handles duplicate filenames e Rename New File use this option when you want the device to name the new file or folder with a unique name e Append to Existing File use this option to add the newly created scanned image file to an existing document with the same name as the document being scanned e This option is not available with Multi Page Tiff and PDF file format options e Overwrite Existing File the new file overwrites the existing file with the same name e Do Not Save the scanned images are not saved if a file with the same name exists e Add Date To Name this option appends a date and time stamp to the filename e Login Name or Login Credentials are used to enter any login details the device requires to access the file
184. equires more time when transmitting over the network Select Edit to change the options Select Apply to save the selections and exit Layout Adjustment These options allow you to manipulate the scanned image and enhance the appearance and style of your filed image The following options are available Distnbution Invormes e Original Orientation is used to specify the orientation of the originals rere being scanned e Original Size is used to enter the size sagan adi garantie al of your document when scanning derer 7 7777777 from the document glass or the S document feeder Your device uses this information to calculate the size of your original and the scanned image Lape devine e Edge Erase is used to erase spots unwanted lines marks and punched holes that appear on your original but are not required on the scanned image 180 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning Creating Templates Filing Options These options are used to specify the document name and file format used to store the scanned images The following options are available e Document Name enables you to name the file that will be stored e File Format determines the type of file created and can be temporarily changed for the current job Report Options These options are used to enable the confirmation sheet and job log e Confirmation Sheet provides information about the success o
185. er Chain dialing combines these 2 entries into a single fax number 1 Select Address Book and then the Chain Dial button e 2 If numbers or special dialing characters are required before the fax number use the numeric keypad to enter the numbers and characters required 3 Select the Address Book entry required and select Add to Recipient a John Doe 1 Alen Were 569 2222 Seve Nash 4 L Soman 11 N 12 1 4 4 The fax number is added to the number in the Recipient entry box Continue adding numbers using the numeric keypad or Address Book until the number is complete 5 Select Save to save your number and return to the Address Book screen 6 Select Close to return to the fax options The number displays in the Recipient list 78 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax Setting up the Address Book Individuals Select the Fax tab and the Address Book button Select the Individuals button from the drop down menu Select an empty slot from the list of entries If necessary use the scroll bar Select the Individual Name field and enter the gt eS es name of the recipient using the keyboard i i To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear 7 99 oli the entire entry select the X button aua Forced 4500 bps Select Save Select the Fax Number field and enter the fax number of the recipient using the keypa
186. er is installed select the finishing option required e Folded amp Stapled will staple and fold the output along the center margin to produce booklets e Folded Only will fold the output along the center ka margin to produce booklets Plight to Lali Booklet Creation 6 Select the Original Input either 1 Sided Originals or 2 Sided Originals depending on the originals being scanned 7 Select Save to confirm your selections 8 Load your originals into the document feeder and select Start to run the job Covers Covers enables blank or printed pages to be added to the front back or front and back of your set This option is also used to add a cover to a booklet The covers can be a different media to the rest of your job Note Covers cannot be used with Auto Paper Supply a paper supply must be specified Use the following instructions to program Covers 1 On the Copy tab select the paper you want to use for the main body of the job 2 Load the media to be used for the covers into another paper tray ensuring that it is in the same size and orientation as the paper you are using for the main body of your job Note For further information about loading media refer to Paper and Media on page 219 Update the Paper Settings screen and Confirm your selections 3 Select Covers from the Output Format tab 4 Select the Covers Option required e No Covers Covers Options e Front Cover Only adds a blank or pr
187. er of Rows and Columns required using the arrow buttons between 1 and 6 6 Select Save to confirm the selections 7 Load your originals into the document feeder and select Start to run the job 62 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Job Assembly Job Assembly Use the productivity features available on the Job Assembly tab to program a job that requires individual selections for sason O Sample Job specific pages or sections produce a Sample Job before aj la printing the whole job or for storing and retrieving 0 Ba Saved Benge frequently run job settings Build Job Use this feature to build a job that requires different settings for each page or asegment of Sj gt lt iN e aT pages TE E You can select the appropriate settings to be some pages some pages Various More than applied to individual pages or segments of a withtextand 2 es alee pades completed job First split the originals into RIS with some 1 sided originals photos sections for individual programing 1 Select Build Job on the Job Assembly tab 2 Switch on Build Job by selecting the On button and Bras select Save 0 pane T 3 Select the features required for the first segment of a the job 2 If using Build Job for a job with tabs ensure the tabs Ua nae Sith is on te Oupa oma are loaded correctly and select the tray containing the Select E
188. erial number is located on a label above the toner cartridge The Xerox Support Center or local representative telephone number is provided when the device is installed For convenience and future reference please record the telephone number in the space below Xerox Support Center or local representative telephone number 10 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started Device Overview High Volume Finisher This optional finisher collates offsets stacks and staples your output Booklet Maker Tri fold and Hole Punch kits can be installed with this finisher Booklet Maker and Trifolder These are optional devices which can be installed with the High Volume Finisher to staple and fold booklets or leaflets Convenience Stapler This optional device provides manual stapling of up to 50 sheets The Convenience Shelf must also be fitted Offset Catch Tray Delivers output collated or uncollated Each set or stack will be offset from the previous to enable easy separation 60 Basic Office Finisher This optional device stacks collates staples and offsets your output Office Finisher This optional device stacks collates staples and offsets your output Hole punch kits are also available for this finisher Document Glass Cover This is a flat hinged cover for the document glass It is fitted instead of the document feeder and is standard on some configurations Device Overview BD 0
189. es Send to a Remotw Maay Store bo Mats Ta Print Mabor Documents Dakia Mazo 5 automatically sent to a remote fax machine when requested 1 Select the Store to Mailbox button 2 Select the Mailbox Number entry field and enter the mailbox number between 001 and 200 3 Select the Mailbox Passcode entry field and enter the 4 digit mailbox passcode 4 Load the originals and select Start Your fax job is scanned and stored in the mailbox and the Mailboxes screen returns Print Mailbox Documents Faxes stored in your mailbox can be printed 1 Select the Print Mailbox Documents button 2 Select the Mailbox Number entry field and enter the mailbox number between 001 and 200 3 Select the Mailbox Passcode entry field and enter the 4 digit mailbox passcode 4 Select Start to print the contents of the mailbox The documents may be deleted after printing depending on the Mailbox amp Polling Policies set Delete Mailbox Documents All the faxes stored in your mailbox can be deleted Mailbox Documents are faxes you have stored ready for Polling and faxes that you have received in your mailbox Mailboxes Send jo a Romote Mamy Sore fo Maibga Print Mazes Docurnants f Dairia Madboo Documents 1 Select the Delete Mailbox Documents button 2 Select the Mailbox Number entry field and enter the mailbox number between 001 and 200 3 Sele
190. es button to display the print driver printing preferences Select Fax as the Job Type on the Paper Output screen of the print driver The Fax Recipients screen will automatically open This screen displays the recipients for the current fax lt lt ae Fax Number Organization LZ You can now Add Fax Recipients or Add From Phonebook Add From Phonebook Select the Add Recipient button Input the name and fax B Pesona Phonebook number of the recipient Complete the additional information Select the Save to Personal Phonebook option if you want to Se add the recipient to your Personal Phonebook To enter a recipient from a phonebook select the Add From 2 Phonebook button Select the phonebook required The system retrieves the phonebook information and the entries are l displayed 012345 888888 Xerox gt Type a name or select the name required from the list e Use the green arrow to add a recipient to the list from the phonebook e Use the Edit button to edit the entry in the Recipient list WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 109 Fax To fax your job the fax option must be installed on your printer and fax must be enabled in the Installable Options screen 1 2 Fax from PC gt Use the Delete button to delete an entry from the list When you have selected all the options you require select OK to continue making selections for the job 6 If you require a Cover Sheet to be sent with
191. f the scanning job and prints at the device when the job has completed e Job Log allows you to print a list of the last jobs that the system has completed processing Workflow Scanning Image Settings These settings are used to set the image optimization the searchable options and the compression settings The following options are available e Optimized for Fast Web Viewing these options are used to set the device to optimize the image file for viewing on a website e Searchable Options are used to select if the file content is searchable and the language options required e Text Compression allows you to enable the text to be compressed if the file format output is PDF or PDF A Compression Capability Use to choose PDF compression for the media type that is most frequently sent to your Xerox device The device is capable of optimizing for mixed text and images or for uniform text or images e CCITT Group 4 G4 MMR provides lossless compression This format is widely supported but some document types may not compress significantly e JBIG2 this compression is usually used for text and halftone documents This compression format requires Acrobat 5 with PDF version 1 4 or greater e Flate Compression used for bi level or color images or for general data It is a lossless compression format that combines LZ77 and adaptive Huffman encoding RFC 1951 e MRC Compression enables you to customize the compression that will be applied
192. flow Scanning O Add File Destinations Then select the Filing Options tab E T File Name This feature enables you to name the file that is stored 1 Using the keyboard enter the name of the file e Upto 50 alphanumeric characters can be entered gt To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the button e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards 2 Select Save to save your selections and exit File Format The File Format determines the type of file created and can EP be temporarily changed for the current job You can select M the file format you wish to use for your scanned image EG a ag Mut Paga TIFF Bast suited loc Sharing and printing documents e TIFF Tagged Image File Format produces a graphic file that can be opened by a variety of graphic software packages across a variety of computer platforms A separate file is produced for each image scanned e Multi Page TIFF produces a single TIFF file containing several pages of scanned images A more specialized software is required to open this type of file format e PDF Portable Document Format allows recipients with the right software to view print or edit the electronic file no matter what their computer platform This option optimizes the file for viewing and printing only POF E Note Depending on the receiving device the PDF selection may not be compa
193. further information refer to the System Administrator Guide Cannot send an E mail e Check if the device is connected on the network e Check that E mail is enabled For further information refer to the System Administrator Guide Avoiding paper jams e Ifthe paper curls excessively flip the paper over in the applicable paper tray e Use paper from a fresh package Cannot fax a document e Ensure the Fax service is enabled e Ensure your device is connected to a telephone socket if using Fax or the network for other fax services The job has been scanned or sent e Select the Job Status button and check the status from the PC but does not print gt If the job is Held select the job in the list and use the Required Resources option to identify the resources required to enable the job to print e If the job is a Secure Print job login and select Release or select Release and enter the passcode required For further information about problem solving refer to Troubleshooting on page 292 of General Care and Troubleshooting WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 35 Getting Started Troubleshooting Jam Clearance Paper and media jams happen for a variety of reasons When a jam occurs the device presents instructions on the screen explaining how to remove the jam Paper Jams Any printed sheets removed will automatically reprint once the paper jam is cleared 1 The fault screen will i
194. g e If the job contains several graphics the device may not have enough fax calls but does not accept memory The device will not answer if memory is low incoming data Remove stored documents and jobs and wait for existing jobs to complete This will increase the available memory Fault messages will not clear There may be occasions when a fault is cleared but the message will not clear Reboot your device by powering OFF and ON using the ON OFF switch at the side of the device Wait approximately 20 seconds before turning the device back ON Any incomplete jobs in the jobs list will be lost Use only the ON OFF switch to reboot your device Damage may occur to your device if power is removed by other means WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 299 General Care and Troubleshooting Further Assistance Further Assistance For any additional help visit our customer web site at www xerox com or contact the Xerox Support Center quoting the machine serial number Xerox Support Center If a fault cannot be resolved by following the touch screen instructions check the Troubleshooting Tips on page 296 they may help to solve the problem quickly If the difficulty persists contact the Xerox Support Center The Xerox Support Center will want to know the nature of the problem the machine serial number the fault code if any plus the name and location of your company System Soltware Version propia
195. g on the device They provide various tests to check the functionality of the system and identify performance levels E User Tests T 2 image Quaiity Tesi Pahane User Interface Tests Use this option to run tests on the User Interface that will help you diagnose screen problems The following tests are available e User Interface Button Test enables the user to test the operation of all the hard buttons on the control panel e Audio Tone Test enables the user to verify that the audible tone created by the user interface is operating correctly e LED Indicator Test enables the user to verify that the lights on the user interface are operating correctly e Touch Area Test enables the user to verify that the touch screen is operating correctly e Display Pixel Test enables the user to check that all the pixels that make up the display screen are operating e Video Memory Test verifies that the memory used by the video controller on the user interface is functioning correctly Symptoms of memory failure are corrupted or non functional screens on the display e Communications Self Test tests the communication between the user interface and the main control functions of the device A communication failure will manifest itself as a corrupt or blank display or an inoperative control panel e Reset UI to Factory Settings provides the facility to reboot or restart the software that controls the user interface On
196. ge feed Media sizes larger than A4 or 8 5x11 must be loaded short edge feed 1 Place the media in the correct orientation for the job The labels on the top of Tray 6 Inserter provide instructions for input and output orientations Refer to Orientation of Pre printed Media on page 232 2 The paper is registered to the left edge of the tray Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line 3 Make sure that the guides just touch the paper WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 231 Paper and Media Tray 6 Inserter Orientation of Pre printed Media It is important to load the media in the correct orientation so that it matches the output The table below compares the various original orientations and how the pre printed media should be loaded in each case Inserter Original Output Tray Orientation Orientation Paper Size and eee Orientation Orientation to match output Output Required A4 8 5x11 LEF Long Edge Feed Stapled Top Left or Non stapled A4 8 5x11 SEF Short Edge Feed Stapled Top Left or Non stapled A4 8 5x11 SEF Short Edge Feed Staple Bottom Left or Non stapled A4 8 5x11 SEF Short Edge Feed Stapled Top Left or Non stapled A4 8 5x11 LEF Booklets from A4 8 5x11 Long Edge Feed Originals A3 A411x17 8 5x11 Booklets from A4 A3 SEF or 11x17 8 5x11 SEF Originals In Foam Eem al al RS 1 Ra Booklet Format
197. ginal e Grayscale to use gray scales instead of color e Color to select color output from your original Note This feature may not be available on your device 2 Sided Scanning The 2 Sided Scanning option allows you to set whether 1 or 2 sides of your original document are scanned Documents must first be loaded in the document feeder to enable the 2 Sided option The options are e 1 Sided is used if your original documents are single sided e 2 Sided is used if your original documents are double sided The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 select if your original opens up like a calendar Original Type Use this option to define the type of original being used for scanning Making the correct selection enhances the quality of your output image The options are e Photo amp Text is recommended for originals containing high quality photographs or line art and text Using this setting the scanned image will contain high quality pictures though the sharpness of text and line art is slightly reduced e Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art e Photo is used specifically for originals containing photos or continuous tones without any text or line art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 175 E mail E mail Scan Presets Use Scan Presets to optimize
198. ginals containing high quality photographs or line art and text Using this setting the scanned image will contain high quality pictures though the sharpness of text and line art is slightly reduced e Photo is used specifically for originals containing photos or continuous tones without any text or line art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art e Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art This option requires less communication time e Halftone Photo is used if your original is from a magazine or newspaper that contains photographs or text Resolution The Resolution affects the appearance of the fax at the receiving fax terminal A higher resolution produces a better quality image A lower resolution reduces communication time The options are e Standard 200x100 dpi is recommended for text documents It requires less communication time but does not produce the best image quality for graphics and photos e Fine 200 dpi is recommended for line art and photos This is the best choice in most cases WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 95 Fax Server Fax Fax Directory The Fax Directory is used to store individual fax numbers which are used frequently The Fax Directory can be accessed from all screens where a fax number requires entering Up to 29 entries can be added Using the Fax Directory If numbers have been entered into the Fax Directory they ca
199. graming such as a different paper color or a different number of inserts select the entry required and use the Edit button to change the programing 160 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Print Special Pages Add Exceptions Use this option to specify the characteristics of any pages in the print job that differ from the settings used for the majority of the job For example your print job may contain 30 pages that print on standard sized paper and two pages that print on a different size of paper Use this option to indicate these two exception pages and select the alternate paper size to use This option is also used if printed tabs are required in the job For further information about loading tabs refer to Media Types on page 233 of Paper and Media To add Exceptions select the Add Exceptions button above the table Enter the page number the exception programing applies to If multiple exceptions are required it is recommended you enter all the page numbers separated by a comma or enter a page range separated by a dash If individual programing is required for some of the exceptions the entry can be edited from the table Select the Paper requirements for the exceptions and select OK If Pre Cut Tab is selected as the paper type the image will be shifted 13mm 0 5 to the right automatically Ensure the correct tab sequence and number of tabs are loaded for the job If Use Job Setting is displayed the sa
200. graphic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 68 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Table of Contents FOK OVCIVICW 32 2 e EEEE EEE E E E EERE E 70 2500000200 0 0 70 e U OX 2 0050008 0 esse oe urewanewanewese te xe de see eee aes EEEE EE 70 eee es 71 20323 0030083 033 S 71 PO ee ee ee oe een 0202000022 2202022200200 2200070000 E 72 PANG COX 244 44 445 sam t o55 35446 000 4540 0 arene enaweds 72 Dialing OPTIONS 22222144446645065snndcinschasan ond anrdds dadedade dade dadedededadedue dee 73 R le Le Rees li bes 5 PO 4 000 76 PRES OMT OMA Os on Ok Oe Oe bh ae E eee ee Ges ee oo oo oa ee 76 00000 EEE EE sua 0 eee eeneennt 76 POGVESS BOOK 2 og te e c ou 5 oer bane meee kan SG E EE EE E A EESAN ENERE ARASA UR ERS 77 ina ore Quality E 0000 00 000 1 EEE E aceneeaees 82 FOX ODON 220000020 0020232022 022050000 00000000 84 VOD PASS 0 90 92 Sending a Server FAX 0 cece eee eee eee e eens ene eben ee enenee 92 DAMO e ne 00 EA AE AN 93 Ele e oes cio A E R E E EAS 94 IV e ae A EE EE EEEE EIEEE ETET EEEE 95 RESOLUTION 2 95 FOODIE TOY 122 ror rAr ENARE ERRE EEEE E EE ena E O 96 OUGULY 0 97 coc 5 5 000 98 OOUE O 00 0 he pee nee esas se eee aera aes 100 Sending
201. h the top towards the front of the device Note Do not fan the label sheets before use unless the package instructs you to do so If jamming or multi sheet feeding occurs shuffle the labels before loading Labels can only be printed 1 sided Trays 1and 2 e Load pre cut tabs in the tray with the tab edge to the right on the trailing edge with the top tab to the front of the tray Bypass Tray e Load pre cut tabs in the Bypass Tray with the tab edge to the left on the trailing edge with the top tab to the front of the tray Ensure the tab sequence and number of tab sets is correct for the document being copied or printed and the quantity required For information about programing a tab job refer to Build Job on page 63 for copy jobs and Add Exceptions on page 161 for print jobs Trays 1 2 3 and 4 e Load up to 200 gsm 53 lb bond paper Tray 5 and Bypass Tray e Load up to 216 gsm 56 lb bond paper or card Paper capacities are reduced for heavyweight paper ensure the paper does not exceed the maximum fill line in each tray Rough Surface paper can be loaded in any tray WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Description Labels that have been designed for laser devices such as Xerox Labels are supported The adhesives are designed to withstand the higher temperatures of these devices without bleeding and causing spotting or damage to the internal components Note Dry gum label
202. han air and is dependent on copy volume Providing the correct environmental parameters as specified in the Xerox installation procedure will ensure that the concentration levels meet safe limits If you need additional information about ozone please request the Xerox publication Ozone by calling 1 800 828 6571 in the United States and Canada In other markets please contact your authorized local dealer or Service Provider WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 7 Safety and Regulations Operational Safety Information Maintenance Information A WARNING Do not use aerosol cleaners Aerosol cleaners can be explosive or flammable when used on electromechanical equipment e Any operator device maintenance procedures will be described in the user documentation supplied with the device e Do not carry out any maintenance on this device which is not described in the customer documentation e Use supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in the user documentation e Do not remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws There are no parts behind these covers that you can maintain or service Consumables Information e Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on the package or container e Keep all consumables away from the reach of children e Never throw toner toner cartridges or toner containers into an open flame Product Safety Certification This device is certified by the following
203. hancement Background Suppression This enhances originals that have colored backgrounds by reducing or eliminating the background on the output This option is useful when your original is on colored paper P image Enhancement e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress unwanted background Auto e Select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature off particularly when e The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals e The original has a gray or colored border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals Select Save to save your selections and exit WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 81 Fax Fax Layout Adjustment The Layout Adjustment options allow you to specify the type and size of document for scanning for example a custom size or book original You can also specify how to process documents that are too big for the receiving fax machine To access the Layout Adjustment options select Services Home and Fax Then select the Layout Adjustment tab Original Size Select Original Size to enter the size of your document when scanning from the document glass or the document feeder Your device uses this information to calculate the size of your original and the scanned image You can also select Auto Detect for automatic size detection or Mixed Si
204. he Disable IP Sec option USB Printer Port This option is used to enable the device to be connected to a workstation via a USB cable There are two modes of use for this option e Software Tools is used to connect the Xerox Copier Assistant Customer Utilities or a Portable Workstation for service call purposes e Direct Printing via Driver is used to connect the device directly to a workstation for printing via a printer driver instead of being installed on a network Note Printing from USB memory sticks is not supported on this device Display Network Settings This option is used to select which network information will be displayed on the Services Home screen 274 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Accounting Accounting The Accounting settings are used to configure the cS accounting options Accounting options are used to record 7 device usage by different groups or departments and can asr 7 Fomign Device itertace Network Accounting si G 9 08 2 also be used to restrict access to different services 4 0 5 5 Ue el On Detailed instructions for Accounting Setups are provided in the System Administrator Guide Accounting Mode Use this option to select the authentication and accounting mode required e Auditron is an accounting system setup on the device to track copy usage for each user e Xerox Standard Accounting is an accou
205. he Auto Center feature and run the job again Refer to Image Shift on page 53 of Copy If scanning from the document glass use Original Size to define the document size refer to Original Size on page 52 of Copy Register the document in the right rear corner and copy with the cover down Do not use heavily embossed paper Blurred images on output Load fresh paper If copying from the document glass check the quality of the originals close the cover and try again Ensure that the original is entirely flat against the document glass Use Original Size to specify the size of the original refer to Original Size on page 52 of Copy Clean the Charge Scorotron and Transfer Corotron if available on your device Refer to Xerographic Module Maintenance on page 291 Clean the document glass and if using the document feeder also clean the Constant Velocity Transport Glass the thin strip of glass to the left of the document glass especially near the plastic ramp on the glass Refer to Document Glass and Constant Velocity Transport Glass on page 290 Missing characters on output Load fresh paper Try using a smoother paper Select darken if the original is light or the font is colored Gloss variations coining Check the quality of the original If the original has large areas of solid density adjust the contrast 298 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Problem Potential Sol
206. he E mail address is added to the recipient list Multiple recipients can be added to the Recipient list in this way Select Close to exit If you are logged in to the machine and your E mail address is known the Add Me button will be displayed Press the Add Me button to add yourself automatically to the recipient list Note The Add Me button is not visible when the Only Send to Self feature is enabled by the system administrator 6 Enter the Message Reply To From and Subject details as required WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 171 E mail Sending an E mail 7 Select the required features for your E mail using the touch screen P Output Color is used to replicate the original colors or to change the output to black and white grayscale or color Note This feature may not be available on your device 2 Sided Scanning is used to select whether your originals are 1 sided or 2 sided The second side can be rotated Original Type is used to define the original document as text text and photo or photo Scan Presets is used to set the scan settings to suit how the scanned image will be used 8 Press Start to scan your originals and process the E mail job Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed Note The E mail job enters the job list ready for sending 9 Select Job Status to view the job list and check the status of your job 172 WorkCentre 5735 574
207. he Telephone Company A plug and jack used to connect this device to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this device It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See installation instructions for details You may safely connect the machine to the following standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C using the compliant telephone line cord with modular plugs provided with the installation kit See installation instructions for details The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local Telephone Company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this device is part of the device identifier that has the format US AAAEQ T The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point e g 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is separately shown on the label 318 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Safety and Regulations Fax Regulations To order
208. he URL field dats ae aaa http 192 168 100 100 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP Address of your device print a configuration report For instructions refer to Print Reports on page 245 of Machine and Job Status Select Scan and select Mailboxes from the display options The Scan to Mailbox options are displayed WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning 1 2 142 Scan to Mailbox Select Create Folder and enter the folder name a password and password confirmation if required Select Apply The new folder is created and is displayed in the folder list To access the private folder and customize the options select the folder If required enter the folder password Select Personalize Settings to customize the scanning selections using the Edit option Select Apply after customizing each option When you have finished customizing your scanning options select Back to return to the Folder Contents screen To change your folder password or delete the folder use the Modify Folder option 8 Your private folder is now set up and will display in the templates list when Workflow Scanning is selected on the device Using Scan to Mailbox Load the original documents in the document feeder or on the document glass Press the Clear All AC button twice and then Confirm to cancel any previous screen
209. he image density on the output and compensates for an original that has too much or too little contrast on the image e Move the indicator up to reproduce more vivid blacks and whites for sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures e Move the indicator down to reproduce more detail in light and dark areas of the original Select Save to save your selections and exit Resolution The Resolution affects the appearance of the scanned C Resolution image A higher resolution produces a better quality image aretet A lower resolution reduces communication time when EF Soo Fee aii ero ie sina sending the file over the network The options are P aaas o Ben et rc cro vi yk Ba acceptable e 72 dpi recommended for output displayed on a Ow o computer It produces the smallest file size 8 e 100 dpi recommended for output that delivers low quality text documents e 150 dpi recommended for average quality text documents and line art Does not produce the best image quality for photos and graphics e 200 dpi recommended for average quality text documents and line art Does not produce the best image quality for photos and graphics e 300 dpi recommended for high quality text documents that are to pass through OCR applications Also recommended for high quality line art or medium quality photos and graphics This is the default resolution and the best choice in most cases e 400 dpi recommended for phot
210. he output is 2 sided e Same as Side 1 settings will apply to both Side 1 and Side 2 of your output e Mirror Side 1 Flip on Long Edge output will open from right to left like a book with the binding edge on the left The position of the annotation on Side 2 will mirror Side 1 For example if a page number is positioned in the bottom left corner of Side 1 it will appear in the bottom right corner of Side 2 e Mirror Side 1 Flip on Short Edge output will open from bottom to top like a calendar with the binding edge at the top The position of the annotation on Side 2 will mirror Side 1 For example if a page number is positioned in the bottom left corner of Side 1 it will appear in the top left corner of Side 2 Select Save to save your selections and exit Transparency Separators Use Transparency Separators to interleave each printed transparency with a blank or printed sheet of paper from a specified paper tray 1 Select the Transparency Separators button on the Output Format tab 2 Select the Transparency Separators option required e Off e Blank Separators adds a blank sheet to each thet an on a aneparency transparency Ps oe e Imaged Separators adds a copy of each 2 transparency T 3 Select the paper tray containing the paper for the separators The selected paper should match the size and orientation of the transparencies If necessary select More to access all the paper tray options 4 Sele
211. hen Left is used to scan both pages but the pages will be scanned in the order specified These options replace the Both Pages option and will not be displayed unless enabled in Tools Refer to Display Options on page 261 of Administration and Accounting e Left Page Only use to scan the left page only Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 25mm 0 to 1 to be deleted from the right side of the page in order to delete unwanted marks reproduced from the gutter of the book e Right Page Only use to scan the right page only Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 25mm 0 to 1 to be deleted from the left side of the page in order to delete unwanted marks reproduced from the gutter of the book Select Save to save your selections and exit Several pages of a bound document can be faxed using the Build Job feature Refer to Build Job on page 90 for more information WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 83 Fax Fax Fax Options The Fax Options allow you to specify how your fax a ee document is transmitted and how it is printed at the S a Wee receiving fax machine To access the Fax Options select E Gji Services Home and Fax Then select the Fax Options tab i taboes Confirmation Report Select Confirmation Report to print a broadcast report to identify the success or failure of a fax job The options displayed depend on the settings enabled in Tools Refer to the System Admi
212. hese safety guidelines at all times Electrical Supply This section provides important electrical supply safety information that you should read before installing or using the device Read the information in the following sections e Power Outlet Electrical Safety on page 305 e Power Cord Electrical Safety on page 305 e Laser Safety Information on page 306 e Device Safety on page 306 e Emergency Power Off on page 307 gt Disconnect Device on page 307 Power Outlet Electrical Safety This device must be operated from the type of electrical supply indicated on the data plate label located on the rear cover of the device If you are not sure that your electrical supply meets the requirements please consult your local power company or a licensed electrician for advice The electrical supply outlet should be installed near the device and should be easily accessible A WARNING This device must be connected to a protective earth circuit This device is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin This plug will only fit into an earthed electrical outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet Always connect the device to a correctly grounded power outlet If in doubt have the outlet checked by a qualified electrician Improper connection of the device grounding conductor can result in electrical shock Power Cord Electrical Safety
213. hic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 186 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Save and Reprint Jobs Table of Contents EAE 188 00 00 2000 202000 0202022022 0200 22 2005000222 189 SOVING O E a o Using the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 7774 189 DIVO serer rsg EAN AANEEN EEN A S ES 190 Using Internet Services sse sreccisrsrsrsiresisieitrereia it ertir iaaa teen eet aai 191 REDMNUING 506 00 192 Using the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 cece cee eee 192 Using Internet Services e e e e e e nnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnn no nnrnrrrrrrnnnnrnnnns 193 FOLI 0 000 eae ee eT 194 Using the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 cece 194 Using Internet Services a ERA EAA AR E 194 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 187 Save and Reprint Jobs Introduction Introduction Reprint Saved Jobs is a standard feature that can be enabled on your device It enables you to retrieve jobs which have been stored on the device using the Store Job feature of the Copy service the print driver or the Internet Services Print Submission option d Prior to using the Reprint Saved Jobs option a job must be saved to a folder on the device For instructions on using the basic Save Job for Reprint features refer to Saving a Job on page 189 Jobs are pl
214. ical Safety 305 Pre printed Media 232 Pre Programmed Settings 65 66 Print 22 150 213 Advanced Options 166 Advanced Paper Selection 155 Booklet Creation 157 Finishing Options 156 Image Options 162 Layout Watermark 163 Paper Selection 155 Special Pages 159 Print Mailbox Documents 86 Print Options Paper Output 153 Print Reports 245 Printing a document 22 Printing User Guides 245 Private Folders 142 Problems 246 Product Recycling and Disposal 317 Product Safety Certification 308 Promoting Jobs 244 Proof Copy 64 Properties 216 Q Quality File Size 107 129 140 179 Quick Restart 18 R Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 316 Recipient 101 173 Reduce enlarge 44 Reduce Split 82 Refresh Templates 129 Releasing Jobs 244 Remote Mailbox 86 Remote Polling 88 Replaceable Units 34 288 Reply To 174 Reports 37 84 108 141 245 Repositories 122 Reprint Saved Jobs 31 188 Reprinting Saved Jobs 192 Reset Software 284 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 325 Index Booklet 47 Output options 46 Overview 11 Copy 21 E mail 28 170 Fax 23 70 Fax from PC 26 71 ID Card Copy 200 Internet Fax 25 71 Print 22 150 Reprint Saved Jobs 188 Reprinting Saved Jobs 31 Saving Jobs 30 Server Fax 24 70 Workflow Scanning 27 122 Overwrite Settings 133 Ozone Filter 288 P Page Layout 163 Page Numbers 58 Paper
215. ice and press Enter to view the Home page Click Index to view the contents of the Internet Services site Click Help to take you to the Xerox online support web site Note To find out the IP Address of your device print a configuration report For instructions refer to Print Reports on page 245 of Machine and Job Status Further Assistance For any additional help visit our customer web site at www xerox com or contact the Xerox Support Center quoting the machine serial number To locate the machine serial number and contact information press the Machine Status button on the control panel The Customer Support information and the Machine Serial Number are displayed on the Machine Information tab 38 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started December 2010 xe OX Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 0 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775
216. iguration report Consumables This option provides information on the life of the device consumables such as the Toner Cartridge R1 and Xerographic Module R2 ra S aio Prom LOT Preparis y rays Laad rtre k Litij k This area displays status information about all the paper trays It also provides information about the tray media and settings SMart eSolutions This option provides information about the SMart eSolutions enabled on the device SMart eSolutions is a hassle free hands free secure way to manage your device via automatic meter reading automatic supplies replenishment and remote diagnostics WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 211 Internet Services Jobs Jobs The Jobs option provides information about the all the incomplete jobs in the Job List on the device and the Saved Jobs Active Jobs Use this option to check the status of your Emm job The Active Jobs list displays a list of the current jobs and the status of each job Saved Jobs Jobs which have been saved to the device memory can be accessed using the Saved 4 ser ssr son Jobs option A Saved Job can be selected and printed deleted copied or moved 212 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Internet Services Print Print The Print option enables you to send ii EIS a print ready job such as a PDF or he
217. images sent from the device using the Server Fax option Internet Fax Impressions displays the number of prints which have been made using the Internet Fax option Embedded Fax Impressions displays the number of prints which have been made using the Fax option Embedded Fax Images Sent displays the number of images which have been sent from the device using the Fax option Black Stored Image Printed Impressions displays the number of prints made from black and white images stored on the device Colored Stored Image Printed Impressions displays the number of prints made from color images stored on the device WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 247 Machine and Job Status The Supplies tab provides status information about the device consumables The percentage remaining is displayed for the Toner Cartridge R1 and other customer replaceable units The projected number of days remaining for the Document Feed Roll R6 Xerographic Module R2 and Fuser Module R3 is also shown Billing Information The Billing Information tab provides the usage counters for all the services Machine Status Tools Tools provides access to the administrative and maintenance tools for the device Access to the entire Tools options is restricted General users are permitted to access options such as Display Brightness Xerographic Module Cleaning Option Enablement and Configuration Report Note Information about the Tools option is p
218. inals 130 140 180 Orientation of Pre printed Media 232 Original Orientation 130 140 180 Original Size 52 82 98 107 130 140 181 Original Type 50 76 95 104 125 175 Output Areas 11 Output Color 103 125 175 Output Destination 158 Output Devices 49 Output Format Booklet Creation 55 Covers 56 Output Option Settings 259 Output Options Managing Jobs 244 Promote 244 Releasing Jobs 244 L LAN Fax 26 71 Language button 16 Layout Adjustment Book Copying 52 Edge Erase 54 Image Shift 53 Invert Image 54 Original Size 52 Layout Watermark 163 Leaflets 48 Lighten Darken 50 81 97 105 127 177 List of Jobs 241 Loading Documents 20 Loading Paper 19 Loading the Bypass Tray 228 Loading Tray 5 230 Loading Tray 6 Inserter 231 Loading Trays 1 and 2 224 Loading Trays 3 and 4 226 Local Polling 88 Local Templates 124 Locating the serial number 300 Log In Out 32 Logs 294 M Machine Administration 252 Machine Defaults 252 Machine Faults 246 Machine Hardware Options 246 Machine Parts 11 Machine Settings 253 Machine Software Versions 246 Machine Status 245 Machine Status button 16 Machine Web Pages 209 Mailbox Polling 88 Mailboxes 86 Mailboxes for Scanning 142 Maintenance 34 288 Maintenance Safety Information 308 Making Copies 21 Managing Folders 194 324 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Index Power On 17 Power Outlet Electr
219. ing Kit enables E mail and Workflow Scanning services The mono scanner is provided as standard Security kit provides additional security features such as image overwrite options Xerox Secure Access provides a card reading device to restrict access to the device Color Scanner used to scan in color Color Scanner used to scan in color factory fit 0000 fit Color Scanner used to scan in color factory fit f Color Scanning Enablement kit a pin code is provided which enables color scanning capabilities Network Accounting enables the tracking of device usage for Print Copy and Scan jobs from multiple devices over the network Xerox Standard Accounting is an accounting tool which tracks the number of Copy Print Workflow Scanning Server Fax and Fax jobs for each user Foreign Interface Device enables the attachment of a third party access and accounting device such as a card swipe or coin operated unit a Requires the Basic or Extended Fax Kit or a Third Party Fax Server to be configured and installed b Requires a Third Party Fax Server to be configured and installed WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 15 Getting Started 9 Interrupt Printing Use to pause the job which is currently printing to run a more urgent copy job Start Use to start a job Clear All Press once to clear a current entry Press twice to return to default settings Stop Stops the job in progress Energy Save
220. inted cover to y p o D lS the front of the document e Front Gaver Oriy Paper Supply Paper Suppiy e Back Cover Only adds a blank or printed cover to 0 the back of the document a e Front amp Back Covers adds a blank or printed cover LJ to the front and back of the document The printing and paper supply options can be programmed individually for each cover e Booklet Cover used to add a cover to a booklet if using the Booklet Creation option 56 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Output Format 5 Select the Printing Options required for the selected covers e Blank provides a blank sheet as the cover e 1 Sided prints an image on one side of the cover e 2 Sided prints an image on both sides of the cover e 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 prints an image on both sides of the cover The image on the second side is rotated to change the read orientation 6 Select the Paper Supply required for the selected covers 7 Select Save to confirm your selections 8 Load your originals into the document feeder and select Start to run the job Inserts Inserts enables blank pages on a different media to be inserted into your document or for specified pages to be printed on a different media Up to two sources of media can be used for the inserts If inserting blank pages a blank sheet must be inserted in the appropriate place in your original document prior to scanning If you have a High V
221. inters without changing drivers e Mobile Express Driver this driver lets you find and print to any PostScript printer in any location from a single easy to use interface without driver downloads and installations Once you have decided upon the most appropriate print driver install it on your workstation in the usual way If you do not know how to install drivers refer to the System Administrator Guide or consult your System Administrator Note You can load more than one print driver for the device on your workstation Then when you send a job to print you can choose the most appropriate print driver for the job Print and Fax Driver Information The Help system is the primary source for information about using the print drivers You can access the Help system through the Help buttons in the driver Included in the Help system are feature descriptions step by step procedures Xerox system information problem solving information and support information WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 151 Print Printing a Document Printing a Document 1 Ensure that the correct Xerox print driver has been installed on your PC To install the print drivers refer to the System Administrator Guide 2 Open the document to be printed From your application select File gt Print and select the Xerox device from the list of printers displayed 3 To change the default printing properties click Properties The print driver has v
222. inting a job At times 2 jobs may require the same resource and the contention management system decides which job has priority This device enables you to change the priority of print and copy jobs e Priority enables you to choose which jobs have priority Copy or Print jobs Use the arrow buttons to set the priority for the Copy Jobs and Print Jobs Number 1 has the highest priority e First In First Out instructs the device to process jobs based on when they are received The jobs are processed in the order they enter the job list Job Operation Rights To delete a job from the Active Jobs list you must have permission The feature enables the Administrator to set the delete permissions e Select the All Users button to give all users the right to delete any job in the jobs list e Select the System Administrator only button to give just the System Administrator rights to delete jobs from the jobs list Configuration Report Provides various options for printing the configuration report when the device is powered on e Print Report prints the configuration report on power up e Do Not Print Report prevents the configuration report from printing on power up e Print Now prints the configuration report immediately Altitude Adjustment The xerographic process used in your device to make prints is affected by air pressure Air pressure is determined by the height of the device above sea level The device will automatically compensat
223. ion and Accounting 258 Device Settings e Held Job Timeout use this option to enable the device to delete jobs which have been held in the job list for a specified period of time and have not been cleared by a user E mail workflow scanning incoming server fax embedded fax and internet fax jobs are not affected by this setting e Enable instructs the device to automatically delete held jobs after the specified period of time Select the period of time between 0 and 120 hours and 0 and 59 minutes e Disable if this option is selected the device will not delete held jobs from memory Output Options Select the Output option to access the following settings e Output Location on page 259 e Out of Staples Options on page 259 e Within Job Offsetting on page 259 e Staple Productivity Mode on page 260 Output Location If your device has a finisher this utility enables you to specify which output tray receives specific types of jobs within the limitations of the finisher and the finishing requirements The Output Location options you have depend upon the finishing options selected e Non Stapled and Non Punched Jobs select the output location for non finished Copy Jobs Fax Jobs Print Jobs and Reports e Punched and Stapled Jobs select the output location for hole punched and stapled Copy Jobs Fax Jobs Print Jobs and Reports e Stapled Jobs select the output location for all stapled Copy Jobs Fax Jobs Print Jobs and Reports
224. irective 1999 5 EC This device if used properly in accordance with the user s instructions is neither dangerous for the consumer nor for the environment To ensure compliance with European Union regulations use shielded interface cables A signed copy of the Declaration of Conformity for this device can be obtained from Xerox Turkey RoHS Regulation In compliance with Article 7 d We hereby certify It is compliant with the EEE Regulation EEE y netmeli ine uygundur 310 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Safety and Regulations Copy Regulations Copy Regulations United States Congress by statute has forbidden the reproduction of the following subjects under certain circumstances Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such reproductions Obligations or Securities of the United States Government such as Certificates of Indebtedness National Bank Currency Coupons from Bonds Federal Reserve Bank Notes Silver Certificates Gold Certificates United States Bonds Treasury Notes Federal Reserve Notes Fractional Notes Certificates of Deposit Paper Money Bonds and Obligations of certain agencies of the government such as FHA etc Bonds U S Savings Bonds may be photographed only for publicity purposes in connection with the campaign for the sale of such bonds Internal Revenue Stamps If it is necessary to reproduce a legal document on which there is a canc
225. ired for your Annotations Refer to Format and Style on page 61 for instructions 8 Select Save to confirm your selections 9 Load your originals into the document feeder and select Start to run the job WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 59 Copy Output Format Date Use the following instructions to add the Date 1 Select Output Format then Annotations and the Date button Select the On button 5 2 Select one of the arrow buttons to determine the Qe L al LA position of the date on the page YYY AMC 8 3 Specify the date format by selecting the DD MM YYYY the MM DD YYYY or the YYYY MM DD button plia x 4 Specify whether you want the date to appear All Pages First Page Only or All Pages Except First 5 Select Save to store your selections and return to the Annotations screen Program additional Annotations as required 6 Program the Format options required for your Annotations Refer to Format and Style on page 61 for instructions 7 Select Save to confirm your selections 8 Load your originals into the document feeder and select Start to run the job Bates Stamp Use the following instructions to program a Bates Stamp 1 Select Output Format then Annotations and the Bates Stamp button Select the On button 2 Select one of the arrow buttons to determine the position of the Bates Stamp on the page 3 Select the Starting Page Number box and use the numeri
226. is finisher can be fitted with the optional 2 3 or 4 Hole Punch kit and the Tray 6 Post Process Inserter kit The High Volume Finisher is also available with a Booklet Maker which enables booklets to be folded and stapled Folded sheets and booklets are delivered to the booklet tray which can hold between 10 and 30 booklets depending upon the number of pages If the flap on the right of the tray is folded down an unlimited number of booklets can be collected in a suitable container If you have a High Volume Finisher with Booklet Maker a Tri fold module can also be fitted This enables your device to produce tri folded output With the Tri fold module fitted the capacity of the finisher stacker tray is reduced to 2000 sheets and a maximum paper weight of 120 gsm 32lb WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 49 Copy Image Quality Image Quality Your device can enhance the quality of your output using the Image Quality features This section describes the options available and when they would usually be used ere OS This includes features such as setting the device to suit the type of input and controlling the lightness darkness sharpness and contrast of the image Original Type This feature provides a convenient way to enhance the copy quality of your output based on the type of original images you are copying and how they were produced Oa l Hira sg R e Photo amp Text is recommended for originals co
227. isplayed as this can cause the memory to become full very quickly WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 269 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Mailbox Setup Incoming Faxes can be stored in mailboxes prior to printing for convenience or added security Users can print the faxes in their mailboxes at anytime This option enables you to create edit and delete mailboxes There is also a facility to print a list of all 200 mailboxes The Mailbox List displays the list of mailboxes available on the system If a mailbox has already been setup and assigned a user a name the name is displayed next to the mailbox number e Edit Mailbox is used to setup or amend an individual mailbox Select the mailbox required from the Mailbox List and select Edit e Mailbox Passcode is used to enter a 4 digit passcode required to access the mailbox e Mailbox Name is used to enter a name for the mailbox e g the owner department or group Use the backspace key to delete an incorrect character entry or Delete Text to delete the entire entry e Mailbox Notification is enabled to provide notification of faxes received into the mailbox If disabled no notification is provided e Delete Mailbox is used to delete a mailbox which has already be setup A confirmation screen displays a warning that the mailbox and its contents are deleted if Confirm is selected e Print Mailbox List is used to print a list of all the mailboxes availabl
228. ist to view the current Recipient list To remove an entry from the list select the entry and select Remove from the drop down menu The recipient is removed from the list 7 Select New Search to continue adding recipients or Close to exit The Address Book Search option can also be used when entering a Reply To or From E mail address 104 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Internet Fax Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings provide access to the features which enhance the image quality or output quality To access the Advanced Settings select Services Home and Internet Fax Then select the Advanced Settings tab Image Options Select Image Options to adjust the lightness and darkness of the image and to sharpen the image The options are Lighten Darken Provides a manual control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images Image Options e Move the indicator down to darken the scanned image for light originals such as pencil images e Move the indicator up to lighten the scanned image for dark originals such as halftones or originals with colored backgrounds Sharpness This provides manual control to adjust the sharpness of the scanned images e Move the indicator up to sharpen the scanned image e Move the indicator down to soften the scanned image Select Save to save your selections and exit Image Enhancement Select Image Enhancement to reduce background and adjus
229. istrator Guide 1 Select New Recipients 2 Enter the name of the recipient and select Search The matching entries are displayed 3 Select the E mail address required The recipient details are displayed to the right of the list 4 Select Add To Add Cc or Add Bcc from the drop down menu F Address Book The E mail address is added to the recipient list Continue adding E mail addresses as required 5 To search different address books select the Internal Address Book option Select the Address Book required using the drop down menu and search USING 7 wen asiress nook Er the same method described 6 Select Recipient List to view the current Recipient list To remove an entry from the list select the entry and select Remove from the drop down menu The recipient is removed from the list 7 Select New Search to continue adding recipients or Close to exit The Address Book Search option can also be used when entering a Reply To or From E mail address 176 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 E mail Advanced Settings Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings provide access to the features aaa en onan nen which enhance the image quality or output quality To access the Advanced Settings select Services Home and E Qe seo lay mail Then select the Advanced Settings tab Image Options Select Image Options to adjust the lightness and darkness of the image and to sharpen the image
230. ith the new name Select the copied template and make any changes required 1 Deleting a Template Templates can be deleted using Internet Services To delete a template select the Internet Services Scan option shoe Sete on Eie ta Dusia benag Ben ezh reine 25 81 Select the required template from the list on the left of the screen Select the Delete button The template is deleted from the list on the left of the screen Note The Default template cannot be deleted 1 Template Options Destination Services File is selected if you only require your Originals to be scanned and stored in the designated filing location Fax is selected if you also require your scanned images to be faxed to a remote fax destination If this is selected the fax destination must also be entered WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 7 Workflow Scanning This option is used to select whether the template is for filing and or faxing Creating Templates File This option is used to select the filing location required for your scanned images A default filing destination is always available If additional locations have been defined by the System Administrator these can also be added to the template 1 To add anew destination select Add The Filing Destination options are displayed 2 Select the destination options required e Select from a Predefined List is selected if the file destination r
231. its is used to select Inches or mm millimeters as the unit of measure e Numeric Separator is used to define which character is used to separate numbers select Comma or Period Paper Management Select the Paper Management option to access the following settings e Paper Settings on page 255 e Tray Settings on page 255 e Default Paper Settings on page 256 e Standard Size Required on page 256 e Paper Substitution on page 256 gt Tray Information Timeout on page 256 Paper Settings Use to specify the size type and color of the media in a tray that has been designated as a dedicated tray For information about setting up a dedicated tray refer to Tray Settings below e Select a tray designated as a dedicated tray e Change Size is used to select the size required for the tray Select the size of media loaded in the tray and select Save e Change Description is used to specify the paper type and color It is important this setting matches the paper type and color loaded in the device Select the appropriate Paper Type and Color setting and select Save e Repeat the process for each of the trays as required Tray Settings Use to apply attributes to each paper tray so they operate productively in your own working environment You can assign trays as dedicated to a specific paper size and type and setup Auto Selection and the selection Priority of each tray e Select the tray required and select Change Settings e Select the
232. l the tray options Select a long edge feed or short edge feed media depending on the output orientation required When a paper supply option is selected the screen graphic illustrates the orientation of the image on the output WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 201 ID Card Copy Image Quality Side 2 Fab eon ome Image Quality Image Quality The Image Quality tab includes Image Quality options for Side 1 and Side 2 Each option is described in detail below Proto and Text Lighten atten Normal Seppression Ott Image Quality Side 1 and Side 2 Use these features to enhance the image quality of your output Individual settings can be selected for into RR RS Lighten Darken Background Suppression ev ae le OH 7 Anio Suppeession eo Barkan Image Quality Side 1 Side 1 and Side 2 The options are Original Type e Photo amp Text is recommended for originals containing high quality photographs or line art and text Using a this setting the scanned image will contain high quality pictures though the sharpness of text and line y art is slightly reduced E e Photo is used specifically for originals containing L gt photos or continuous tones without any text or line nera art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art e Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art e Halftone
233. lates 122 124 Test Patterns 283 TIFF 108 132 182 Timers Settings 258 Toner Cartridge 288 Tools Pathway 252 Resolution 76 95 106 128 140 178 Retrieve Saved Settings 66 S Safety Contact Information 319 Safety Labels and Symbols 304 Sample Set 64 Save and Reprint Jobs 188 Save Current Settings 65 Saved Job Folders 194 Saved Jobs 212 Saving a Job 189 Saving Energy 18 Saving Jobs for reprint 30 Saving Programing 65 Scan 214 Scan Presets 126 176 Scan to Home 145 Scan to Home Options 146 Scan to Mailbox 142 Scanning Books 52 Screen 51 Secure Faxes 116 Secure Polling 88 Security Settings 281 Selecting a Template 124 Send Header Text 85 Send to Mailbox 86 Sending a Fax 23 72 Sending a fax from PC 26 Sending an E mail 28 Separating Transparencies 61 Server Fax 24 70 Service Settings 263 Services 12 Services and Options 12 Services Default 254 Services Home Job Status button 16 Setting Accounting 275 Audio Tones 254 Date amp Time 254 Embedded Fax 266 Job Deletion 281 Measurements 255 On Demand Image Overwrite 281 Output Options 259 Paper Size Preference 255 256 Paper Tray Management 255 326 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Index 327 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Index Touch Screen 16 Transmission Report 84 Transparency Separators 61 155 Tray 5 229 Tray 6 Inserter 231 Tray Management Settings 255
234. lders Managing Folders The folders are set up by the System Administrator using Internet Services and can be managed by the users Folder management tasks can be performed at the device using the Reprint Saved Jobs service or at your PC using Internet Services Using the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5 765 5775 5790 1 Press the Services Home button 2 Select the Reprint Saved Jobs option Folders containing the saved jobs are displayed 3 Select the File Folder Management option The a Manage Folders options are as follows e Open Folder opens the selected folder e New Folder is used to create a new folder Enter the folder name and select the access options required e Modify Folder is used to edit the folder name or access details e Delete is used to delete a folder and its contents Within each folder the options are as follows e Back to Folders is used to return to the folder list e Rename Job is used to rename selected job e Select All is used to select all the jobs within the folder e Deselect All is used to deselect any jobs selected e Delete is used to delete the selected file s 4 Select Close to exit the File Folder Management option Using Internet Services Create New Folder Folders and the files saved within them can be managed using Internet Services 1 Open the web browser from your Workstation 2 Inthe URL field enter http followed by the IP Address of the device Fo
235. le Punch to punch the paper e Select No Hole Punching to switch off hole punching Note The number of holes punched and their location depend on the hole punch unit in the finisher Folding e Bi Fold folds the output in the middle creating two sides e C Tri Fold folds the output to create three sides with the outer flap folded over the inner flap e Z Tri Fold folds the output to create three sides in a Z effect e Select No Folding to switch off folding 156 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Print Paper Output Booklet Creation Select this menu item to display the Booklet Creation screen to Miler rection select booklet layout and booklet finishing options cess hai 1 wll None or Xe BS oan Fold Booklet Finishing gt 65 Booklet Fold and Staple e Select Booklet Fold to fold the booklet pore e Select Booklet Fold and Staple to staple the booklet in the lanned aes center and then fold Z Print Page Borders Booklet Paper Size LJ V Automatically Select Booklet Layout e Using the option the document pages are rearranged into the ao an v correct sequence to create the booklet EN L Gutter 0 216 Points e Use Print Page Borders to place a border around the images or R text on each page T Creep 0 0 1 0 Points RS Booklet Paper Size gt Use Automatically Select to enable the printer to select the paper size for the job gt Toselect a paper
236. ling is used for sensitive documents Access is only granted if the fax numbers of the retrieving devices have been entered or if the Allow All Address Book numbers access option is selected a Select the Secure Polling button and then Enabled b Select the Polling Passcodes button and add the fax numbers of the devices retrieving the document Alternatively select Allow All Address Book numbers access to enable all fax numbers stored in the Address Book access to the document Local Polling Use Add to add more than one number to the list To delete a number from the list select the entry and select Delete d Select Close to exit e Load the originals to be stored for polling and press Start The originals are scanned and stored in memory ready to be polled e Print Polling Documents prints the documents stored in memory e Delete Polling Documents deletes all stored documents A confirmation screen is displayed select Delete All or Cancel Select Save to save your selections and exit 88 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax Poll Remote Fax The Poll a Remote Fax feature allows you to call a remote fax machine The call locates and retrieves faxes stored at the remote machine Remote Polling allows you to poll a remote machine immediately or at a specified time More than one remote machine can be polled at a time Select the Poll a Remote Fax button and select On Then select Sa
237. lity or make smaller files A small file size delivers slightly reduced image quality but is better when sharing the file over a network A larger file size delivers improved image quality but requires more time when transmitting over the network The options are e Normal Small produces small files by using advanced compression techniques Image quality is acceptable but some quality degradation and character substitution errors may occur with some originals e Higher Larger produces larger files with better image quality e Highest Largest produces the largest files with the maximum image quality Large files are not ideal for sharing and transmitting over the network Select Save to save your selections and exit Layout Adjustment The Layout Adjustment options allow you to manipulate the scanned image and enhance the appearance and style of your faxed document To access the Layout Adjustment options select Services Home and Internet Fax Then select the Layout Adjustment tab Original Size Select Original Size to enter the size of your document when scanning from the document glass or the document feeder Your device uses this information to calculate the size of your original and the scanned image You can also select Auto Detect for automatic size detection The options are e Auto Detect is the default setting and enables automatic size sensing The size detected is matched to a standard size paper gt Pre set Scan Areas a
238. ll choose not to print the banner sheet from the print driver for specific jobs e Print Banner Sheets select Enable to print a banner sheet or Disable to switch off the banner sheet option e Print Driver Override select Enable to allow the print driver to produce Banner Sheets if required or Disable to only use the device setting Output Error Sheets Enables the device to print an error report if an error occurs during a print job e Enable is selected to print an Output Error Sheet e Disable switches off the Output Error Sheet option Scan Status Sheet This feature enables the device to print a status sheet when a Workflow Scanning job is completed e Enable is selected to print a Scan Status Sheet e Disable switches off the Scan Status Sheet e Errors Only prints a Scan Status Sheet if an error occurred during the job Paper Type amp Color Allows you to select the type and color of media used to print the job sheets e Select the required Paper Type and Paper Color Server Fax Status Sheet This feature enables the device to print a status sheet when a Server Fax job is completed gt Enable is selected to print a Server Fax Status Sheet e Disable switches off the Server Fax Status Sheet e Errors Only prints a Server Fax Status Sheet if an error occurred during the job 264 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Reduce Enlarge Presets Select the Redu
239. llows you to define the size of your original from a list of pre set standard document 0 e sizes You can view the list by using the scroll bar e Custom Scan Areas is used to enter a specific area for scanning Measure the area to be scanned on the original and enter the X and Y axis measurements into the fields provided Only the area specified is scanned Select Save to save your selections and exit WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 107 Fax Internet Fax Internet Fax Options The Internet Fax Options allow you to temporarily change the format of the image file set a Reply To address and add O Aeknawiedgement Raport a brief message The Acknowledgement Report can also be Fij enabled To access the Internet Fax Options select Services Home and Internet Fax Then select the Internet Fax Options tab File Format File Format determines the type of file created and can be temporarily changed for the current job You can select the file format you wish to use for your scanned image The options are Multi Page TIFF Tagged Image File Format e This format produces a single TIFF file containing several pages of scanned images e Amore specialized software is required to open this type of file format PDF Image Only Portable Document Format e This allows recipients with the right software to view print or edit the Internet Fax file no matter what their computer platform Note Depending on the receiving
240. llows you to define the size of your original from a list of preset standard original sizes You can view the list by using the scroll bar Custom Scan Areas is used to enter a specific area for scanning Measure the area to be scanned on the original and enter the X and Y axis measurements into the fields provided Only the area specified is scanned E Original Size Mixed Size Originals allows you to scan documents containing different size pages The pages must be the same width like A4 LEF and A3 SEF 8 5x11 LEF and 11x17 SEF Other combinations are shown on the screen Select Save to save your selections and exit Edge Erase Edge Erase enables you to specify how much of the image to erase around the edges of your document For example you can remove the marks caused by punched holes or staples in your original The options are All Edges is used to erase an equal amount from all So the edges Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount to be erased from 1 mm to 50 mm 0 1 to 2 0 All marks or defects within the measurement set are deleted Individual Edges enables an individual amount to be erased from each of the edges Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount for each edge from 0 mm to 50 mm 0 to 2 0 Scan to Edge use this option to scan to the edge of the image Select Save to save your selections and exit WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 181 E mail E mail O
241. lphanumeric characters can be entered e To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the X button gt Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards If an address book has been setup enter the name required and select Search A list of matching names is displayed Select the E mail address required and select Save 4 If required select Save to save and return to the previous screen or Cancel to exit The E mail address entered is displayed in the From field 174 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 E mail E mail Subject To enter a subject for the E mail 1 Select the Subject field 2 Using the keyboard enter the subject of the E mail e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered gt To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the button e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards 3 Select Save to save and return to the previous screen or Cancel to exit The subject entered is displayed in the Subject field Output Color Select the Auto Detect option in Output Color to automatically detect and match the color of your original and produce black and white grayscale or color output from your original The options are e Auto Detect to select output that matches your original e Black amp White to select black and white output regardless of the color of your ori
242. lution reduces communication time The options are e Standard 200x100 dpi is recommended for text originals It requires less communication time but does not produce the best image quality for graphics and photos e Fine 200 dpi is recommended for line art and photos This is the best choice in most cases e Superfine 600 dpi is recommended for photos and halftones or images that have gray tones It requires more communication time but produces the best image quality Cover Letter The Cover Letter feature attaches a cover letter to the document being transmitted Using the cover letter feature replaces the routine of manually sending a cover letter each time you send a document The Cover Letter includes the following information gt To the recipients name can be entered at the device e From the sender s name as entered at the device e Comment the comment as specified from the comment list e Start Time the date and time of the fax transmission Depending on the setup the time is displayed as a 12 or 24 hour clock This information is added automatically to the cover letter e Pages the page count excluding the cover page This information is added automatically to the cover letter e Fax number the number of the sending fax device This information is added automatically to the cover letter 76 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax To select a Cover Letter 1 Select the Cover Letter but
243. m to the current job Changes can be made to the retrieved settings but these will not be stored with the saved settings To retrieve saved settings 1 Select the Retrieve Saved Settings button on the Job Assembly tab E Retrieve Saved Settings To recall a program sequence select the desied numbor 1 10 Select Load Settings A mossage wil daplay confirming saved sottings 2 Use the arrow buttons to enter the number for the saved settings Revie te sequence deed Press Start to begin your job 3 Select the Load Settings button to retrieve the programing information The recalled programing features become active 4 YOU can modify the features further These additional modifications are not saved with the saved settings Modify the selections as required 5 Load your originals and press the Start button to run the job 66 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy December 2010 xe OX Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typo
244. may request that you disconnect the device until the problem is resolved Repairs to the machine should be made only by a Xerox Service Representative or an authorized Xerox Service provider This applies at any time during or after the service warranty period If unauthorized repair is performed the remainder of the warranty period is null and void This device must not be used on party lines Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your office has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line make sure that the installation of this Xerox device does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your Telephone Company or a qualified installer WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 315 Safety and Regulations Fax Regulations Canada Note The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the device meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the User s satisfaction Before installing this device users must make sure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the loc
245. me paper as the main job is used Note If adding tabs to your job refer to Media Types on page 233 of Paper and Media Select the 2 Sided Printing requirements for the exceptions Add Exceptions gt Use Job Setting uses the same programing applied to the 7 Paes main job 5 and or page ranges separated by commas e 1 Sided Print prints the exception pages on one side only For exemple 1 3 5 12 e 2 Sided Print prints the exception pages on both sides of 7 Paper the sheet of paper with the images printed so the job can pm be bound along the long edge of the sheet e 2 Sided Print Flip on Short Edge prints the exception ee x pages on both sides of the sheet of paper with the images ae printed so the job can be bound along the short edge of Ls A4 010x 237 i the sheet teal Default Type Job Settings displays the paper requirements specified for the main job Select OK to save your selections and exit All the exceptions programed display in the table If any exceptions pages require individual programing such as a different paper color or a different number of inserts select the entry and use the Edit button to change the programing WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 161 Print 1 Image Options Image Options The Image Options tab enables you to adjust the lightness or darkness of the image Paper Output Special Pages Image Options Layout Watermark Advanced Move
246. mmended for output displayed a gt Resolution computer It produces the smallest file size 200 x 100 dpi dots per inch 72 dpi Good image quality e 100 dpi recommended for output that delivers low en starr ee quality text documents SA 0 costtr standart atico documents and photographs 150 dol Meet standard e 150 dpi recommended for average quality text documents and line art Does not produce the best image quality for photos and graphics e 200 100 dpi recommended for standard office documents and photographs e 200 dpi recommended for average quality text documents and line art Does not produce the best image quality for photos and graphics e 300 dpi recommended for high quality text documents that are to pass through OCR applications Also recommended for high quality line art or medium quality photos and graphics This is the best choice in most cases e 400 dpi recommended for photos and graphics It produces average image quality for photos and graphics e 600 dpi recommended for high quality photos and graphics It produces the largest image file size but delivers the best image quality Select Save to save your selections and exit 106 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Internet Fax Quality File Size The Quality File Size settings allow you to choose between scan image quality and file size These settings allow you to deliver the highest qua
247. n Select Instructions for fault clearance instructions Active Messages This option displays a list of all the current fault messages The message and the code associated with the message is displayed Event Log The Event Log is a log of all the device errors A fault code and the date and time of the fault is displayed If the fault occurred during a job the image count and the paper size of the job is also provided 246 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Machine and Job Status Machine Status Supplies Total Impressions displays the total number of print and copy impressions the device has made This is the counter used for billing purposes Black Copied Impressions displays the total number of impressions made using Copy Black Printed Impressions displays the total number of impressions made using Print Black Large Impressions displays the total number of impressions made where the mark on the media exceeds 935 sq cm 145 sq in Server Fax Images Sent displays the number of images which have been sent from the device using the Server Fax option Network Images Sent displays the number of images sent from the device using the Workflow Scanning option Internet Fax Images Sent displays the number of images sent from the device using the Internet Fax option E mail Images Sent displays the number of images sent from the device using the E mail option Server Fax Impressions displays the number of
248. n be accessed via the Fax Directory button 1 Select the Fax Directory button ic A list of fax numbers entered in the Fax Directory is displayed 2 Select the required number and select Add to Recipients from the drop down menu The number is added to the Recipient list Continue adding recipients as required 3 To edit an entry select it in the list and select the Edit button Edit the entry as required and select Save 4 To clear an entry from the list select the entry requiring deletion and select Clear Entry from the drop down menu A confirmation screen is displayed select Clear Entry 5 Select Close to return to the fax options The fax will be sent to all the numbers in the Recipient list Setting up the Fax Directory 1 Select the Server Fax tab and the Fax Directory button 2 Select an empty slot from the list of entries If necessary use the scroll bar 3 Enter the fax number in the Edit Fax Number field Use the C button to delete an incorrect entry or to clear the entire entry select the X button Select Save The new entry is displayed in the list 4 To use the entry for the current job select the entry in the list and select Add To Recipients The number is added to the Recipient list 5 To edit an entry select it in the list and select the Edit button Edit the entry as required and select Save 6 To exit from the Fax Directory select Close 96 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765
249. n speed is 14 400 Bits Per Second bps This rate minimizes transmission errors by using Error Correction Mode ECM Forced 4800 bps e Used in areas of low quality communication when experiencing telephone noise or when fax connections are susceptible to errors e Forced 4800 bps is a slower transmission rate but is less susceptible to errors In some regional areas the use of Forced 4800 bps is restricted Select Save to save your selections and exit Delay Send Select Delay Send to specify the time within the next 24 hours that you want the fax to be transmitted Use this feature to transmit faxes during off peak hours or when sending to another country or time zone Delay Send can also be used with Mailbox and Polling options 1 Select Specified Time and select either the Hour or the Minute field to enter a time to send your fax 2 Use the arrow buttons or numeric keypad to enter the hours and minutes If the device is set up to display the time using a 12 hour clock you must also select either the AM or PM button 3 Select Save to save your selections and exit Once scanned the fax will be stored in memory and sent at the specified time Note Delay Send can be used for Batch Send fax jobs For more info refer to Batch Send on page 5 Send Header Text This feature allows you to add header text information when sending the fax This is in addition to the standard header text The information is printed i
250. n the folder selected If Copy amp Save was selected a copy of the job is also printed For information about File Folder Management refer to Managing Folders on page 194 of Save and Reprint Jobs Save Current Settings Up to ten combinations of commonly used feature selections can be retained in the device memory as Saved Settings The device stores only the programing of the job NOT the image Each time Saved Settings are retrieved and used the image must be scanned To save the current settings 1 Program the required job features Save Current Settings 2 Select the Save Current Settings button on the Job reaper ee ee eee ce ee Assembly tab Fisi make your toabe selections Thon ratum to Save Settings gt Solpct tho programming sequence number siccage 1 10 3 Usethe arrow buttons to enter a number for the saved eal eek fos ee eae Fe settings ees eee Racer Aa E nein ere If a number has already been used to store settings previously a confirmation message is displayed Select Overwrite to replace the stored settings or Cancel to cancel the Save Current Settings operation 4 Select Save Settings The settings are stored and can be accessed using the Retrieve Saved Settings feature WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 65 Copy Job Assembly Retrieve Saved Settings This feature enables you to Retrieve Saved Settings from the device memory and apply the
251. n the header at the top of each page of the fax transmission The information included is displayed on the screen and can be customized using Tools Refer to the System Administrator Guide for more information Select On then Save to enable the Send Header Text to print on the fax output WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 85 Fax Fax Mailboxes Mailboxes are areas of device memory where incoming faxes are stored or from which outgoing faxes can be polled Mailboxes enable you to store all received fax documents until it is convenient to retrieve them Conversely storing fax documents in a mailbox for Polling allows a remote user or users to retrieve the fax on demand Mailboxes must be set up by the System Administrator before fax documents can be stored in them The device can contain up to 200 electronic mailboxes within its memory To allow a remote user to fax to your mailbox they must know your mailbox number To retrieve a document from your mailbox the remote user must know your mailbox number and if appropriate your passcode The mailbox passcode ensures that the fax documents held in the mailbox are secure and can only be accessed by an authorized user The passcode is a 4 digit number If the mailbox has been setup with a passcode of 0000 then any combination of numbers including no numbers can be entered as the passcode to gain access to the mailbox Select the Mailboxes button The options are Send to a Rem
252. n to disable a feature 1 Sending an Internet Fax Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections Press the Services Home button and select the Internet Fax option The Internet Fax features are displayed Select New Recipients Select To Cc or Bcc for the recipient using the drop down menu to the left of the entry box Gi Fn Using the keyboard enter the E mail address ri e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered a B 1 e To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the button e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards Select Add to add the E mail address to the Recipient list Continue adding E mail addresses until all the recipients have been added to the list then select Close All the recipients are displayed in the Recipient list WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax 1 100 Internet Fax If an address book has been setup enter the name of the recipient and select Search A list of matching recipients is displayed Select the E mail address required and select Add To
253. n your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features Refer to Log In Out on page 32 of Getting Started 1 To select the Fax service press the Services Home button 2 Select the Fax option When a service is selected on the device additional options and features are displayed Most feature screens include the following buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen If an option is not required use the Off option to disable a feature Sending a Fax 1 Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder 2 Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections 3 Press the Services Home button and select the Fax option The Fax features are displayed 4 Enter the recipient s fax number by e Keypad Dial select the Enter Number area on the touch screen and enter the number using the numeric keypad a __ Original Type Teed e Manual Dial if a telepho
254. nal Auditron Setup Select the User Accounts and Access Rights button Select the User Account number using the up down arrows or by selecting the User Account entry box and entering the number using the numeric keypad Select Default Account to set the counts back to 0 Select the User Number entry box and enter the User Number specifically chosen for deactivated accounts Select Close to exit T 6 To reactivate the account replace the deactivated accounts User Number with a genuine User Number WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting 278 Accounting Auditron Reports The Auditron report lists the total copies made by all User Accounts Group Accounts and General Accounts since the accounts were reset To print the report 1 Select Accounting Settings and Internal Auditron Setup 2 Select the Auditron Reports button 3 Select Print Account Report The report lists the total copies made by all User Accounts Group Accounts and General Accounts since the accounts were reset Log In Out with Auditron Enabled If Auditron has been enabled on the device you must login to use the Copy and Fax services Each user is allocated access rights and a numeric passcode by the auditron administrator When the Copy or ID Card Copy button is selected from the Services Home screen a User Account Login screen is displayed 1 Tolog in select the Log In Out button on the control panel
255. nd Build Job to indicate that job programming is tabs For loading instructions select the Tab Loading T Ena pun sos corps Te jt lt pintat he sored Instructions option Note If tab media is selected the image will be shifted 13mm 0 5 to the right automatically if the tab original is A4 or 8 5x11 size Load the first segment originals and press Start 5 Remove the first segment originals after they have been scanned The Build Job screen displays the first segment in the list The following options can be applied to any segment e Sample Last Segment produces a proof print of the last segment scanned The proof is delivered to the output module If you are satisfied with the proof you can continue programing the Build Job e Delete Last Segment deletes the last segment scanned You can continue programing the Build Job e Delete All Segments deletes the current Build Job and returns you to the main Build Job screen 6 Select the options required for the second segment WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 63 Copy Job Assembly 7 Load the second segment originals and press Start 8 Repeat these steps until all segments of your job have been programmed and scanned 9 After the last segment has been scanned select End Build Job to indicate you have finished scanning and the job will be processed and printed Sample Job When copying a large number of sets use the Sample Job feature to review a
256. nd output that job as many times as you need Many of the job settings that were applied when the document was originally stored are also recalled and displayed to the user when the job is selected These settings can be modified and will be applied to the output job To store a job for reprinting E Save Job for Reprint 2 Select the Save Job For Reprint button on the Job SEES Ree anaes eae ee slored as an electronic fie in a folder on the machine The Job settings such as 2 Assembly tab can than be at a laiar cata Sor 3 Select the Save Job for Reprint option required The Save Oriy buon shores te job wih no printing an he Copy amp Save 1 Program the required job features ution wall product a Copy H the scanned orginal as whi as soning them job e Copy amp Save is used to store the job and print a This feature aiso supports th storage of documents pred rom a remate computa Solecting Fie Foidor Managomen displays options ior maw Inder creation joker copy of the job access setings modification and dolation ol an existing toler e Save Only stores the job without printing 4 Select a folder location to store the job 5 Select New Job Name and enter a name for the job using the keyboard Select Save to save the job name and return to the previous screen 6 Load your originals into the document feeder and select Start to run the job The job is scanned and saved with the name entered i
257. nd the image quality settings are defined within the template along with the template name The template name is displayed within the template list accessed on the device touch screen You can select an existing template as is or use Internet Services to create a brand new one or modify an existing one To successfully complete a Workflow Scanning job you must select a template from the device touch screen Template operations can either be performed using Internet Services or FreeFlow SMARTsend For information about FreeFlow SMARTsend templates refer to the FreeFlow SMARTsend User Guide This guide is included with the FreeFlow software documentation that accompanied your device 122 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning Workflow Scanning Options Workflow Scanning Options To select the Workflow Scanning service press the Services Home button Select the Workflow Scanning option Additional options and features are displayed Most feature screens include the following buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen If an option is not required use the Off option to disable a feature
258. ndicate the location of the jam Use the green handles and knobs indicated in the instructions displayed on the screen to remove the jammed paper 2 Ensure that all jam clearance handles and levers are returned to their correct positions The red flashes behind the jam clearance handles and levers should not be visible Note Jam Clearance areas vary depending on your device model and configuration Document Jams 1 Remove all the documents from the document feeder and document glass as instructed 2 Re order the documents as at the start of the job and reload The documents will be recycled automatically to recover the job For further information and help refer to Troubleshooting on page 292 of General Care and Troubleshooting 36 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started Help Help When using your device detailed and timely help is available at your fingertips You can access Help information and tips from a variety of sources On the Device Press the Help button at any time to access the online help screens Messages screen instructions and graphics provide additional information Information Pages The user documentation and various reports can be accessed and printed at the device 1 Press the Machine Status button and select Machine Information 2 Select Information Pages A list of the reports and documentation available is displayed 3 Select the report or document required and sele
259. ne handset is attached to the device select the Manual Dial key and dial the number using the handset or the numeric keypad e Speed Dial select the Enter Number area and enter the 3 digit speed dial number then select the Speed Dial option e Address Book select the Address Book button to access the fax address book Select an entry from the Address Book to add to the Recipient list Continue adding recipients as required and select Close to return to the previous screen Note To use the Batch Send feature to send multiple faxes to the same destination in one transmission refer to Batch Send on page 75 for instructions 72 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax If required select Add to add the number entered to the Recipient list Enter additional numbers as required The fax will be sent to all the numbers in the Recipient list Select the required features for your fax job using the touch screen Dialing Characters are alphanumeric characters which have a specific fax function and can be entered as part of the fax number Cover Letter allows you to send a fax with a covering letter 2 Sided Scanning is used to select whether your originals are 1 sided or 2 sided Original Type is used to define the original document as text text and photo photo or halftone photo Resolution can be used to optimize the resolution settings Press Start to scan the originals and process the fax job Rem
260. ne network Received faxes can be setup to print at the device automatically held in the job list until a secure passcode is entered or sent to an E mail address using the Fax Forward feature Refer to Receiving a Fax on page 116 for further information The standard Fax option has the ability to connect to one telephone An Extended Fax option is also available which utilizes two telephone lines Using two telephone lines provides the capability to simultaneously send to 2 destinations receive from 2 destinations or send and receive For instructions on using the Fax service features refer to Fax on page 72 Note If Fax and Server Fax are installed on your device only one of these services can be active at a time Each service remains on the device but one is enabled and one is disabled Server Fax Server Fax scans your documents and sends them to any type of fax machine that is 3 connected to a telephone network Your images are sent from your device to a Third Party fax server which relays them over the telephone network to the fax number of your choice This means that your fax transmissions are g controlled by the server which may limit your C 3 gwnd faxing options For example the server may be set up to collect and send all faxes at off peak times RightFax 613 For instructions using the Server Fax service features refer to Server Fax page 2 Note If Fax and Server Fax
261. ned and then filed e Content Type is used to define the type of original being used for scanning e How Original was Produced is used to select the production method of the original e Scan Presets are used to optimize scan settings to match the intended purpose of the scanned documents WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 139 Workflow Scanning Creating Templates Advanced Settings These settings provide advanced scanning options used to adjust image quality select the file size and enhance the image The following options are available e Image Options are used to adjust the image quality applied to the scanned document e Image Enhancement is used to select an image quality setting appropriate for your originals e Resolution is used to define the resolution to use for scanning the original The higher the scanning resolution the better the image quality although a larger image file is created e Build Job allows you to build a job that requires different settings for each page or a segment of pages or has more originals that can be scanned in the document feeder at one time e Quality File Size allows you to choose between scan image quality and file size These settings allow you to deliver the highest quality or make smaller files A small file size delivers slightly reduced image quality but is better when sharing the file over a network A larger file size delivers improved image quality but r
262. nes whether an incoming fax is printed onto media that is selected automatically by the device according to the parameters of the fax or specified manually within this feature e Automatic an incoming fax will be printed on paper that most closely matches the attributes of the fax e Manual use this option to control the media used for printing incoming faxes There are 4 parameters that you can set Paper Size Stock Defaults Page Margin and Receive Header Ring Volume This setting enables the user to hear a ringing tone from the device when an incoming fax is being received e Disabled deactivates the tone e Enabled instructs the device to sound the tone when a fax is received Select High Medium or Low Secure Receive If this option is enabled a 4 digit passcode is requested The passcode is then required in order to print any incoming fax e Disable enables all incoming faxes to print without the passcode e Enable activates Secure Receive enter a 4 digit passcode to be used to release incoming fax jobs for printing 268 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Default Output Options If your device is fitted with a finisher you are able to staple 2 hole punch or 2 side your incoming faxes This utility is used to specify the output options you require for all your incoming faxes e Stapled staples all incoming fax output if enabled e Punched prints all in
263. ng Network Setup These options are used by the System Administrator to configure the network settings Network settings for TCP IP Microsoft Network Apple Talk and Netware can be configured Online Offline Use to disconnect the device from the network temporarily Selecting Offline disconnects the device from all networks Any job entering the system is held Any current outgoing jobs are not completed while the system is offline Select Online to reconnect the device to the network Ethernet Physical Media The Ethernet Physical Media option is used to set the speed of your network The device supports the following selectable speeds e Auto e 10Mbps Half Duplex e 10Mbps Full Duplex e 100 Mbps Half Duplex e 100 Mbps Full Duplex e 1 Gbps Half Duplex e 1 Gbps Full Duplex 802 1x The device supports 802 1x authentication based on the Extensible Application Protocol EAP 802 1x Port Based Network Access Control is used to ensure that devices that are connected to the network have the proper authorization The 802 1X configuration is used to authenticate the device rather than an individual user After the device has been authenticated it will be accessible to users on the network WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 273 Administration and Accounting Network Settings IP Sec IP Sec is a security protocol enabled using Internet Services To disable IP Sec on the device select t
264. ng The 2 Sided Scanning option allows you to set whether 1 or 2 sides of your original document are scanned The options are 1 Sided is used if your original documents are single sided 2 Sided is used if your original documents are double sided The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 select if your original opens up like a calendar The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option Original Type Use this option to define the type of original being used for scanning Making the correct selection enhances the quality of your output image The options are Photo amp Text is recommended for originals containing high quality photographs or line art and text Using this setting the scanned image will contain high quality pictures though the sharpness of text and line art is slightly reduced Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art Photo is used specifically for originals containing photos or continuous tones without any text or line art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 125 Workflow Scanning Workflow Scanning Options Scan Presets Use Scan Presets to optimize scan settings to match the intended purpose of the scanned documents The options are Sharing amp Printing is used for sharing files that are going to be viewed on scre
265. ng xe OX k i 2010 Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Print 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 148 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Print Table of Contents 150 Fax Drivers 5a agent rasa gn 0000000000 0 150 R A 152 Pan mO Cs 153 Seance 000000020 200002000 2000200 153 00 00 00 JOD PODOI 100 0000000 0000 04000000 000500 15 eRe a tne 156 00 0 PeSIGS PINUNO ace 156 44444464 OGiIDUC DESUMGUONM a aN ewes R N N RE debate 18 SP ALPAGO 22 00 00000000 00 0 aac A 159 Lee e 1002222222 020002022 29220 23 ne ee se ee ees Se ee eee See 159 POG Bp L 440000 160 scenes ne aan eaean E eae eg na S S onde cdaneane cad 161 52 5 053504 2 Add 162 Layo t Watermark 5 56 atseseeeeRecneteaneedatedatece Seles taedtaewedened 163 Nee Ee Ue
266. ng Started Internet Fax Internet Fax 1 Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder 2 Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections 3 Press the Services Home button and select the Internet Fax option The Internet Fax features are displayed 4 Select New Recipients 5 Select To or Cc for the recipient using the drop down menu to the left of the entry box 6 Using the keyboard enter the E mail address e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered gt To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the button e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards Select Add to add the E mail address to the Recipient list Continue adding E mail addresses until all the recipients have been added to the list then select Close All the recipients are displayed in the Recipient list If an address book has been setup enter the name of the recipient and select Search A list of matching recipients is displayed Select the E mail address required and select Add To or Add Cc from the drop down menu The E mail address is added to the recipient list Multiple recipients can be added to the R
267. nistrator Guide for more information The options are Print Confirmation e Use to print a transmission report containing details about the fax together with a reduced copy of the first faxed page e The Confirmation report is printed after every transmission e When sending a fax to multiple recipients one report is printed listing all of the recipients Print On Error Only e Select this option to print the Confirmation report only if an error occurs with the transmission Select Save to save your selections and exit Starting Rate Use Starting Rate to select the top transmission speed of your fax job The actual transmission speed will depend on the receiving fax machine The options are Super G3 33 6 Kbps gt The fastest fax transmission rates and the default option e Determines the transmission rate to be used based on the maximum capabilities of the receiving fax machine gt This rate minimizes transmission errors by using Error Correction Mode ECM Initial transmission speed is 33 600 Bits Per Second bps 84 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax G3 14 4 Kbps gt The standard Group 3 fax transmission rates These are used in fax environments where there is existing noise or stress on the phone network which prevents higher speed fax transmissions working well e Selects the transmission rate based on the maximum capabilities of the receiving fax machine e Initial transmissio
268. nt s information gt Earnings or Income e Court Record gt Physical or mental condition e Dependency Status e Previous military service Exception United States military discharge certificates may be photographed Badges Identification Cards Passes or Insignia carried by military personnel or by members of the various Federal Departments such as FBI Treasure etc Unless photograph is ordered by the head of such department or bureau Reproducing the following is also prohibited in certain states e Automobile Licenses e Drivers Licenses e Automobile Certificates of Title O oND 10 The above list is not all inclusive and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy In case of doubt consult your attorney WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Safety and Regulations 312 Copy Regulations Canada Parliament by stature has forbidden the reproduction of the following subjects under certain circumstances Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such reproductions Current bank notes or current paper money Obligations or securities of a government or bank Exchequer bill paper or revenue paper i The public seal of Canada or of a province or the seal of a public body or authority in Canada or of a court of law 5 Proclamations orders regulations or appointments or notices thereof with intent to falsely cause same to purport t
269. nt to your Personal Phonebook Select OK to confirm your entry Your entry has been added to the Recipient list To enter a recipient from a phonebook select the Add From Add From Phonebook Phonebook button B s Phonebook You can choose from 3 Phonebooks Personal Shared and Shared LDAP The Personal and Shared phonebook information eL Opanization is stored in data files The file for your Personal phonebook will be located on your PC or personal file space The file for the Shared phonebook will be located on a server and can be shared with other people The Shared LDAP option will be linked Fax Number Organization to your company phonebook if you have one Jane Smith 012345 888888 Xerox Select the phonebook required The system retrieves the S phonebook information and the entries are displayed gt Type a name or select the name required from the list gt Use the green arrow to add a recipient to the list from the phonebook e Use the Edit button to edit the entry in the Recipient list gt Use the Delete button to delete an entry from the list When you have selected all the options you require select OK to continue making selections for the job WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 111 Fax 1 Fax from PC Preferences The Preferences screen enables you to set up your Phonebooks and display preferences to suit your own requirements Phonebook Preferences Select Fax as the Job Type on the
270. ntaining high quality photographs or line art and text Using 9 this setting the scanned image will contain high Oe quality pictures though the sharpness of text and line art is slightly reduced e Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art e Photo is used specifically for originals containing photos or continuous tones without any text or line art Produces the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art e Halftone Photo is used if your original is from a magazine or newspaper that contains photographs or text Select Save to save your selections and exit Image Options Image Options provides options for changing the appearance of the copy output The options are Lighten Darken This provides manual control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images e Move the indicator down to darken the scanned image for light originals such as pencil images e Move the indicator up to lighten the scanned image for dark originals such as halftones or originals with colored backgrounds Sharpness This provides manual control to adjust the sharpness of the scanned images e Move the indicator up to sharpen the scanned image 50 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Image Quality gt Move the indicator down to soften the scanned image Screen This option is available with Photo and Text Text and Halftone Photo Original Type options The Screen
271. nting system setup using the Internet Services user interface Once enabled the IP Address of the device is entered and Xerox Standard Accounting can be setup e Foreign Interface Device is used if a third party device is installed on the device for accounting purposes For example card activated or coin activated devices can be installed e Network Accounting is a feature of the device which automatically tracks print scan server fax and copy usage for each user Network Accounting is run over a network and the accounting functions are performed remotely via third party software Select On to enable the authentication and accounting mode required For information about setting up Xerox Standard Accounting Network Accounting and Foreign Interface Device options refer to the System Administrator Guide Auditron Setup The Auditron is an accounting feature of the device which automatically tracks copy usage for each user The Auditron will prevent unauthorized access to the Copy or ID Card Copy features of the device It is enabled or disabled by the System or Auditron Administrator The Auditron comes as standard on all devices The Auditron cannot be enabled if the Save Job for Reprint feature is installed and enabled If the Auditron is enabled and the user selects Copy or ID Card Copy a passcode must be entered before the features become available On completion of the session the user must log out of the Auditron This enables logs
272. ntly printing the job e Scheduling the job has been converted into the appropriate format and is being scheduled to print e Pending the job has been scanned but is awaiting the resources to be formatted e Paused the active job was paused The pause can be initiated using the Stop button on the control panel by selecting Pause from the print queue screen on your computer or due to a system fault during the running of the job The job is not deleted from the list and can be resumed e Interrupted the job was interrupted because a task at the device is being carried out Once the task has been completed the interrupted job automatically continues e Sending the device is sending the job through a network transmission e Completed the job was successfully completed without errors e Waiting for Printer the job is ready to print and is waiting for the current job to finish printing and the required resources to become available e Formatting the job is being converted into the appropriate format For print tasks the job is decompressed for fax internet fax scan and E mail tasks the job is compressed e Scanning the device is currently scanning the image for this job ready for formatting e Held the job has been temporarily stopped from printing because the required resources are not available The job remains in the job list and continues to proceed up the list as prior jobs are printed If a held job is at the top of the list all subseq
273. ntre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning Scan to Home Scan to Home Scan to Home allows you to scan hard copy originals at the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 and send them to a destination on the network which is specified as your Home destination You enter your Network Authentication log in at the device The device displays one Scan to Home template When you scan a document the authentication server provides the information as to who is logged in at the device The Workflow Scanning option needs to be installed before this feature can be used but it is NOT necessary for the Workflow Scanning repositories and templates to be configured Your System Administrator enables the Scan to Home option in Internet Services Your System Administrator also needs to enable Network Authentication for this feature to be available Lightweight Directory Application Protocol LDAP connectivity may also be used Using Scan to Home The Scan to Home option must be enabled and set up by the System Administrator in order for the Scan to Home template to be available on the device You must also be logged in on the device using Network Authentication to use this option 1 Load the original documents in the document feeder or on the document glass 2 Press the Clear All AC button twice and then Confirm to cancel any previous screen programing selections 3 Tolog in select the Log In Out button on th
274. o anc ep eee ma eneeeuds 201 raste 2 ys Bee oes da eee eee eee weees 202 Copying an UAC gt 0 20 0000000020 0050005200 0000000908 204 4 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Table of Contents 208 E E E E 209 0 0 es tease cnee een aan aeaes 210 E er ee eT ee ee ee 212 PUM Gs 20 2002222222 2222222020 0020000200 00 0000000020 213 0 0 214 005 0000 840684090 oo pode EE deo dasdes ea ciees esuderedes 215 Neena ee ee 216 SUDDOM cig2csecesteececsasie secs 20 0 00 217 ae e ee ee eee 218 Paper and 000 219 hns sse Tage vests pee poe Oe ne oe ne ne ee 222 TNS TIO 0000000000 223 TS GINO os teh 5g EEE Gg eve eee oe eae ew ene E EN 225 BY OOSS WAV 20 yess sense sees eu eine seen aes 22 209 E PEE EEE 7 231 VV OCs 224 6 a45 24 44 bas5ou RE cess ede yeas se sebs 5055 bees aoe beer ore nwernees 233 Storage and Handling lt lt nns nnnn unner n nerse on eners ornrrrsroorererno 235 Macnee ond JOD AOU e 20 40 2500 23 220 0 0 JOO 20 22 eee ee 241 WIOCMING SEQUUS ua20 04 2505 oho peer 2 7 7 EE 245 Administration and ACCOUNTING 211111 249 TOONS Bae tes 545 9 252 DEVICES aT s
275. o have been printed by the Queens Printer for Canada or the equivalent printer for a province 6 Marks brands seals wrappers or designs used by or on behalf of the Government of Canada or of a province the government of a state other than Canada or a department board Commission or agency established by the Government of Canada or of a province or of a government of a state other than Canada 7 Impressed or adhesive stamps used for the purpose of revenue by the Government of Canada or of a province or by the government of a state other than Canada 8 Documents registers or records kept by public officials charged with the duty of making or issuing certified copies thereof where the copy falsely purports to be a certified copy thereof 9 Copyrighted material or trademarks of any manner or kind without the consent of the copyright or trademark owner The above list is provided for your convenience and assistance but it is not all inclusive and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy In case of doubt consult your solicitor Other Countries Copying certain documents may be illegal in your country Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty of making such reproductions e Currency notes e Bank notes and cheques e Bank and government bonds and securities e Passports and identification cards e Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner gt Postage stamps an
276. of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 120 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning Table of Contents INCOGUCTION 2 8 122 REDOSILORES 2ctecetcncceeccesesoeecaiaeetoeemsokeaness tate bn eae een eemenaeaneekes 122 E R E EE EEE EEE EEE AE EE E E 122 Workflow Scanning OpHONS 44020 001647 0 0000000000 0000030000 13 Selecting a Template e e een e eee ene eens 124 00 eessen renea eo no aonee nae E E ha 8 125 SCOMMING 22424 ccaweveweresecasehscacansabadaey one 125 ORIGUNONL TYPO 25 c 62 4052 0 4 05 50966400840405005040564000004saseerevaradecsvadadadadse a 125 SCO 0500 2220005200 ohne ee ae ne mun een need 00 126 Advanced lt 127 Image ODON 452220225 02222000 00200000 0000000000 0002200000 00 127 Image Enhancement lt e e e e e een rrr ene eens 127 ROOT E E E E E E E E 128 0 7 ERAEN ESNE E 129 Update Tema 2 0000000 129 Layout Adj sStMEnt lt gt 20 NE EN EEE E ER 130 Original 130 a a 130 S 6 EO earr E Se ee ee A ee ee eee 131 220 12
277. olume Finisher and the optional Tray 6 Inserter installed you can feed the inserts from this tray Media loaded into Tray 6 Inserter is not part of the printing process therefore blank pages do not need to be added to your original document When entering the insert page numbers the insert sheets are counted as a page Note Inserts cannot be used with Auto Paper Supply a paper supply must be specified Use the following instructions to program Inserts 1 On the Copy tab select the paper you want to use for the main body of the job 2 Load the media to be used for the inserts into another paper tray ensuring that it is in the same orientation as the paper you are using for the main body of your job Note For further information about loading media refer to Paper and Media on page 219 Update the Paper Settings screen and Confirm your selections 3 If blank inserts are required add blank sheets to your set of originals where the inserts are to be placed Select Inserts from the Output Format tab Select On to enable inserts as i co Paper Supply 1 Paper Supply 2 LM Aa Dy Tab Loading iio Pa Page Numbers of Inserts Pann Nuribers of rens 1 3 5 24 6 EF A mA WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 57 Copy Output Format 6 Enter the page number of the insert The page numbers are the physical page numbers and not the page numbers which may already b
278. on page 233 of Paper and Media Specification information for the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 is provided at www xerox com WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 19 Getting Started Loading Documents Loading Documents Original documents can be loaded either into the document feeder or onto the document glass 1 Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to just touch the documents 2 Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder Note Original documents are only scanned once even when several copies are selected Specification information for the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 is provided at Wwww xerox com 20 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started Making Copies Making Copies 1 Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to just touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder 2 Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections 3 Press the Services Home button and select the Copy yout option 5 4 400 7 The Copy features are displayed 4 ChE 1 L r
279. on to add recipients to the Group 6 Individual or Group recipients can be added to a Group gt To add an individual entry select Individuals from the drop down menu Select the entry required and select Add to Group e Toadda group entry to the new group select Group from the drop down menu Select the group entry required and select Add to Group 7 Continue adding individuals and groups until all the recipients have been added 8 Use Remove to delete any unwanted entries from the Group 9 Select Save when you have finished adding recipients The recipients display in the list 10 Select Close to return to the Address Book screen The new Group has been created 11 To amend a Group entry use the Edit Details option 80 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax Image Quality The Image Quality options provide access to the features which enhance the image quality or output quality To O Image Options access the Image Quality options select Services Home pe OO ig and Fax Then select the Image Quality tab Image Options Lighten Darken This provides manual control to adjust the lightness or darkness of the scanned images Image Options gt Move the indicator down to darken the scanned image for light originals such as pencil images e Move the indicator up to lighten the scanned image for dark originals such as halftones or originals with colored backgrounds Image En
280. ons tabs P Output Color is used to replicate the original colors or to change the output to black and white grayscale or color Note This feature may not be available on your device 2 Sided Scanning is used to select whether your originals are 1 sided or 2 sided The second side can be rotated Original Type is used to define the original document as text text and photo or photo Scan Presets is used to set the scan settings to suit how the scanned image will be used Press Start to scan the originals and process the Workflow Scanning job Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed The Workflow Scanning job enters the job list ready for filing The scanned images are then filed to the location specified on the template ready for retrieval by the user 2 Selecting a Template Default Template this is the template supplied with your device software and is always available at the top of the list Once your System Administrator has set up the file repository they define the parameters of the Default template Any user can select the Default template make the programing selections required for their individual job and scan their originals Local Public or Private Templates are created using Internet Services Users can create a new template delete an existing template or copy and then modify an existing template Network Templates are advanced network scanning templates and wo
281. ons tee pee oe ne he 253 Service SSL 5 errer aie 002000 002000225 02000200 5505000208 203 SONING S erami na EEEE E E EAE T E EEE EEEE aac EEEE N 273 ACCOUN INO ee EE E E 275 281 00 252 202 0000000000 202227200 0022000 00 2 2200 00 General Care and Troubleshooting ee 285 Generol C AE e e EEE EIEEE SERES en eer 288 TOUDE POON TTT 292 F ea ons rAr A E ESA S EEAS RNN ANER 300 Saroy ana st Lena eT 301 INOUICES GING ee E E ie E E 304 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 5 Table of Contents safety Labels and sie 24 sess eeaee ARARATS 304 Operational Safety 1 7002111112 305 Basic REQUICLIONS 2 0 0000000 309 Copy eE 614 6 NS e en ee eer ce kre eee eee een eee ee ee eee eee Te 311 0005 0000000 314 Material Safety Data nnan nnnnnnnn ennenen nnne n nner nn errores rrer rrorrrrrorrrron 317 Product Recycling and Disposal 0 0 ccc cece ene c n eeren teen eens 317 Energy Program Compliance 0 6 a Ra a duane T a E R T A N A A ATRE T Guu R R A 318 EH amp S Contact INPOMMGUONM lt 0 6 9 6 0 E 8 EH AR A E teed ndmcutewedeld ses aa aa raa 319 ea 4 250 00 0 20 bens 321 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Table of Contents Version 2 0 Decem ber 2010 xe OX Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5
282. ontents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 206 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Internet Services 207 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Internet Services Table of Contents Introduction eee Using Internet Services ees cctueos sie estaectwessewseewe Welcome 2 00 c Description amp Alerts Billing Information Usage Counters Configuration Consumables WOVS c5 2002 sos rrr SMart eSolutions SMart eSolutions IODS oocadeteeedeseededecececcieass Active 005 6 Saved 1005 3 9 da UDO eer ICID Seese rara EN Introduction Introduction Internet Services uses the embedded HTTP Server on the device This allows you to communicate with the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 through a web browser V Entering the IP Address of the device as the URL Universal Resource Locator in the browser provides direct access to the device over the internet or intranet Internet Inte
283. open this type of file format e TIFF 1 File per Page produces a graphic file that can be opened by a variety of graphic software packages across a variety of computer platforms A separate file is produced for each image scanned e JPEG 1 File per Page Joint Photographic Experts Group produces a compressed graphic file that can be opened by a variety of graphic software packages across a variety of computer platforms A separate file is produced for each image scanned Select Save to save your selections and exit WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 183 E mail Job Senra sill More than 100 pages Various sized some 1 sided originals Delete All Segments deletes the entire jobs Select End Build Job to indicato that job programming R complnin Repeat these steps until all segments of your job have been programmed and scanned After the last segment has been scanned select End Build Job to indicate you have finished Job Assembly Job Assembly This tab provides access to the Build Job feature for compiling jobs which have different originals or programing requirements within a job To access the Job Assembly options select Services Home and E mail Then select the Job Assembly tab Bud Joba ay Build Job Use this feature to build a job that requires o different settings for each page or a segment of E aml p You can select the ap
284. opy Regulations 311 Copy To 103 Copying an ID Card 204 Index Numerics 2 Sided 75 94 104 125 156 175 2 Sided Copying 46 A Access 32 Accessing Tools 252 Accounting Settings 275 Acknowledgement Report 108 141 Active Jobs 212 241 Add File Destinations 133 Address Book 73 77 104 176 215 Group Entry 80 Individual Entry 79 Administration Settings 252 Advanced Options 166 Advanced Paper Selection 155 Advanced Settings 140 Alerts 210 All Services 143 145 All Services Default 254 Annotations 58 Assistance 10 37 Audio Tones Setting 254 B Background Suppression 51 81 105 127 177 203 Basic Copying 21 Basic E mail 28 Basic E mailing 173 Basic Fax from PC 26 Basic Faxing 23 72 Basic Internet Fax 25 Basic Office Finisher 49 Basic Options 100 111 Basic Printing 22 Basic Safety Regulations 309 Basic Scan to Home Options 146 Basic Server Fax 24 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 1 Index E Echo test 283 Edge Erase 54 131 140 181 Edit Image Enhancement 140 Electrical Supply 305 E mail 28 170 173 Address Book 176 From 174 Image Options 177 Message 173 Output Color 175 Reply To 174 Scan Presets 176 Subject 175 Embedded Fax 23 70 72 Embedded Fax Settings 266 Embedded Web Pages 209 Energy Program Compliance 318 Energy Saver 18 ENERGY STAR 318 Enlarge reduce 44 Entering a Fax Number 73 Server Fax
285. or sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures e Move the indicator towards low to reproduce more detail in light and dark areas of the original Select Save to save your selections and exit WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 51 Copy Layout Adjustment Layout Adjustment Using the Layout Adjustment features you can change the appearance of your output image This includes shifting O original Biz O Book Copying O mage Shin the image producing a mirror image deleting an area from any or all of the edges of the original and copying from O a Eras O tnvet mage bound originals aye L Original Size Original Size allows you to specify automatic size detection of the originals mixed size originals or the specific size of the image to be scanned The options are mi e Auto Detect is the default setting and enables wv 00 automatic size sensing The size detected is matched e i to a standard size paper 7 S Original Size F Mixed Size Cnipa e Preset Scan Areas allows you to define the size of your original from a list of preset standard original sizes You can view the list by using the scroll bar e Custom Scan Areas is used to enter a specific area for scanning Measure the area to be scanned on the original and enter the X and Y axis measurements into the fields provided Only the area specified is scanned e Mixed Size Originals allows you scan documents containing different siz
286. ort glass Any dirt or marks on this piece of glass will cause lines or streaks on your copies faxes or scanned images Also any marks or dirt on the Constant Velocity Transport roll may show through the document and appear on your scanned images 1 Use a lint free cloth lightly dampened with Xerox Anti Static or general cleaning fluid or another suitable non abrasive glass cleaner to clean the document glass and the Constant Velocity Transport glass ZS 2 Wipe away any residue with a clean cloth or paper towel 3 Use a lint free cloth lightly dampened with water Xerox cleaning fluid or Xerox film remove to clean the under side of the document cover or document feeder and the complete circumference of the Constant Velocity Transport roll Control Panel Touch Screen Document Feeder and Output Trays Regular cleaning keeps the touch screen control panel and other device areas free from dust and dirt 1 Use a soft lint free cloth lightly dampened with water 2 Wipe clean the entire area of the control panel including the touch screen 3 Wipe clean the document feeder output trays paper trays and other outside areas of your device 4 Remove any residue with a clean cloth or paper towel 290 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 General Care and Troubleshooting General Care Xerographic Module Maintenance At regular intervals depending on device usage this message will be displayed re
287. os and graphics It produces average image quality for photos and graphics e 600 dpi recommended for high quality photos and graphics It produces the largest image file size but delivers the best image quality Select Save to save your selections and exit 178 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 E mail Advanced Settings Quality File Size The Quality File Size settings allow you to choose between scan image quality and file size These settings allow you to deliver the highest quality or make smaller files A small file size delivers slightly reduced image quality a ahh el but is better when sharing the file over a network A larger file size delivers improved image quality but requires more time when transmitting over the network The options are E Quality File Sine e Normal Small produces small files by using advanced compression techniques Image quality is acceptable but some quality degradation and character substitution errors may occur with some originals e Higher Larger produces larger files with better image quality e Highest Largest produces the largest files with the maximum image quality Large files are not ideal for sharing and transmitting over the network Select Save to save your selections and exit Note If you change the Quality File Size option you may affect the settings in the Scan Presets options on the E mail tab WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 179
288. ot staple or gt To correct stapling problems ensure the maximum number of sheets is hole punch correctly not exceeded for the finisher being used e The maximum number of sheets when stapling heavyweight paper is determined by the finisher type The Basic Office Finisher staples 12 sheets of heavyweight paper the Office Finisher staples 20 sheets of heavyweight paper and the High Volume Finisher staples 30 sheets Check the correct option has been selected on the touch screen e Check the touch screen for a fault message indicating no staples Replace the staple cartridge e When using large paper remove any output contained in the Stacker Tray e Check that the hole punch waste container is not full The hole punch waste container collects waste from the hole punch e Check the correct paper size has been selected for the paper loaded in the tray e Check the paper tray guides are locked into position against the paper Stray marks or black marks e Use the Edge Erase option to erase the edge with the punched holes from hole punched originals are Refer to Edge Erase on page 54 of Copy not removed e Copy from the document glass with the document cover or document feeder down Images are out of sequence or gt Ensure that the originals are in the correct sequence upside down when the Booklet e Feed LEF originals to SEF orientated paper Creation feature is used e Enable the display options for Booklet Creation and ensure that the
289. ote Mailbox This feature enables you to send a fax directly to an individual s private mailbox on a remote machine The remote machine must have mailbox capabilities 1 Select Send to a Remote Mailbox Mailboxes 2 Select the Fax Number entry field and enter the recipient s fax number using the numeric keypad Alternatively select the Address Book option and AES select the recipient from the directory Store lo Malbon Print Mathon Documents To send to a remote mailbox you must know the recipients mailbox number 3 Select the Mailbox Number entry field and enter the mailbox number between 001 and 255 4 Select Save to save your selections and exit 5 If required use Delay Send to program a specific time to send the fax Refer to Delay Send on page 85 for more information 6 Load the originals and select Start on the control panel to send the fax to the recipient s mailbox A Store to Remote Mailbox message is displayed for information If enabled by your System Administrator a report is printed once the documents are sent to the remote mailbox 86 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax Store to Local Mailbox This feature allows you to store documents to be polled The document is stored in your mailbox and Mailboxes Mallbow Humber oMi 200 ca Sond to a Remote Malic 2 Store to Mailbox Pring Malipo Oonmumenis eo Celene Documents Mailbox
290. ou when to order a new Toner Cartridge R1 and when to install it This option allows you to control how the toner usage monitoring system works Reorder Notification enter the number of days notification required between 1 and 25 Toner Cartridge Status when this option is Enabled the device will analyse the toner usage predict the toner remaining and the estimated number of days remaining When this option is Disabled the device will not predict the toner usage and you will not receive a re order reminder Cancel Current Notification once the re order message has appeared and you have placed your order for a new module you can switch the message off by selecting this button Confirm Toner Replacement if you replace the Toner Cartridge R1 when instructed to do so by the message on the display the device resets the toner usage counters If you choose to install a new Toner Cartridge R1 before the message is displayed you will have to reset the toner usage counters manually by selecting this option Note Selecting this option when you haven t replaced a Toner Cartridge R1 will disable the toner re order message for this toner cartridge Timers Select the Timers option to access the following settings System Timeout use to set whether the device should return to the default screen and feature settings after a set period of time e Enable instructs the device to timeout after the specified period of time Select the period of
291. ource required 3 Ensure the job resources are available in order for the job to print or select Release the job is released for printing 244 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Machine and Job Status Machine Status Machine Status When the Machine Status button is selected information about the device is displayed Machine Information General Information about the device is displayed onthe J Ce T right providing customer support and supplies contact Covert matin details the machine serial number and the software aoe Peers oan version number If installed the Fax Line ID is also me Supplies Munnkear c 71 Print Reports Fax Line IDs displayed Ss ae Ss lac nine Hardware LE Options Machine Serial Number Total Impressions KAO The following options are also available Machine Software maar Paper Tray Status Information about each of the trays including the Bypass pme Tray is displayed The paper Size Type and Color are the 5 attributes set when loading the trays Information Pages This option provides access to individual guides and how to sheets which can be selected and printed on your device The guides provide information about the setup functions and features of your WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Select the document required and select Print Print Reports Using this option a System Configura
292. ove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed Note The Fax job enters the job list ready for sending Select Job Status to view the job list and check the status of your job 5 6 Dialing Options The dialing options enable you to enter the destination fax number or numbers Select the appropriate dialing option for your fax job Manual Dialing Select the fax number field and enter the fax number required using the numeric keypad If special characters are required use the Dialing Characters option to enter the number plus additional dialing characters Refer to Dialing Characters on page 74 for further information Select Add to add the number to the Recipient list Enter additional numbers as required To amend the Recipient list e Select the entry in the list If necessary use the scroll bar to access all the entries e Use Edit to amend the entry Use Remove to delete the entry from the list or Remove All to delete all entries The fax will be sent to all the numbers in the Recipient list WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 73 Fax 1 Fax Speed Dialing If numbers have been entered into the Address Book they can be accessed via a Speed Dial number Each entry in the Address Book is allocated a 3 digit Speed Dial number shown next to the entry For information about the Address Book refer to Address Book on page 77 1 Select the Speed Dial
293. ow much the page images are shifted outward in 10ths of a point Note Some media types sizes and weights cannot be stapled punched or folded Refer to www xerox com for specifications information If your document is already formatted as a booklet do not select Booklet Layout Page Layout Options If the orientation is not already set in your application select the orientation from the first drop down menu Portrait prints the text and images across the shortest dimension of the paper Landscape prints the text and images across the longest dimension of the paper Rotated Landscape places the landscape text and image upside down rotates the text and image 180 degrees Select the sides printed option required from the second drop down menu 1 Sided Print prints on one side of the paper or transparency Use this option when printing on transparencies envelopes or labels 2 Sided Print prints on both sides of a sheet of paper with the images printed so the job can be bound on the long edge of the sheet 2 Sided Print Flip on Short Edge prints on both sides of a sheet of paper with the images printed so the job can be bound on the short edge of the sheet Note You can also select these options on the Paper Output tab for 2 Sided Printing If you select multiple pages per sheet for Pages Per Sheet or Booklet Layout select one of the following options from the third drop down menu No Page Borders does not print a border a
294. per tray 2 to enable envelope printing Up to 55 10 Envelopes 4 1 x9 5 can be loaded in the tray Offset Catch Tray delivers collated or uncollated output C Basic Office Finisher stacks collates staples and offsets your output Office Finisher stacks collates staples and offsets your output Hole punch kits are also available for this finisher High Volume Finisher collates offsets stacks and staples your output Booklet Maker Trifold and Hole Punch kits can be installed with this finisher Hole Punch Kits available with the Office Finisher and the High Volume Finisher The kits available are 2 Hole 2 Hole Legal 3 Hole 4 Hole or Swedish 4 Hole Only one kit can be fitted at one time Convenience Stapler for manual stapling The Convenience Shelf must be installed Convenience Shelf a shelf which can be installed on the left side of the device Basic Fax Kit Embedded this kit enables a single fax line connection Extended Fax Kit yer aig mga this kit enables two fax lines to be yer aig mga LAN Fax enables users to send faxes directly from their PC using the print and fax drivers 14 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started Services and Options WorkCentre Description 35 40 fo 55 65 75 0 Server Fax enables users to send and receive hard copy faxes via a fax server Internet Fax allows users to send or receive faxes over the internet or intranet Network Scann
295. pment industry to promote energy efficient copiers printers fax multifunction devices personal computers and monitors Reducing device energy consumption helps combat smog acid rain and long term changes to the climate by decreasing the emissions that result from generating electricity Xerox ENERGY STAR equipment is preset at the factory Your device will be delivered with the timer for switching to Power Save Mode from the last copy print out set at 1 minute 5735 2 minutes 5740 5 minutes 5745 8 minutes 5755 5765 and 15 minutes 5775 5790 A more detailed description of this feature can be found in the User Guide 318 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Safety and Regulations EH amp S Contact Information Canada Environmental Choice Terra Choice of Canada has verified that this device conforms to all applicable Environmental Choice EcoLogo requirements for minimized impact to the environment Asa participant in the Environmental Choice program Xerox Corporation has determined that this device meets the Environmental Choice guidelines for energy efficiency Environment Canada established the Environmental Choice program in 1988 to help consumers identify environmentally responsible products and services Copier printer digital press and fax products must meet energy efficiency and emissions criteria and exhibit compatibility with recycled supplies EH amp S Contact Information For more information on
296. proof copy to ensure that all the print settings are correct before printing the remaining sets 1 Select the Sample Job button on the Job Assembly tab 2 Select the On button and the Save button 3 Load the originals in the document feeder and Wham you xt Stat at your rl wit be sb suring but oriy ono program the job requirements Enter the total quantity 7 Tha sama mages mit remain manera te joo wi be dnt Sa E required and press the Start button 27 One copy set of the job the Sample Job is printed The whole job is held in the Job List 4 Access your job by selecting the Job Status button The job has the status Held Sample Made 5 Select the job in the list If the Sample Job is acceptable select Release The programmed number of sets will be produced If the Sample Job is unacceptable select Delete and Delete Job to confirm Your job will be deleted from the list E Sample Job Alor inspection of the sample go lo Job Status and select your job Select Delete to remove the job and macan Select Release 9 continue printing the entire job 64 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Job Assembly Save Job for Reprint The Save Job For Reprint feature allows you to scan hard copy documents as an electronic file or Job and place it into a folder located on the device The job settings such as 2 sided and image quality selections are also stored with the image Once stored you can select a
297. propriate settings to be Some pages Some pages applied to individual pages or segments of a with ba and 2 sided and completed job First split the originals into newt photos sections for individual programing 1 Select Build Job on the Job Assembly tab 2 Switch on Build Job by selecting the On button and E Build Job select Save 0 3 the options required for the first segment of the A job Load the first segment originals and press Start 5 Remove the first segment originals The Build Job screen displays the first segment in the list Delete All Segments deletes the current Build Job and returns you to the main Build Job screen Select the options required for the second segment Load the second segment originals and press Start oND scanning and the job can be processed and completed WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 E mail 184 Version 2 0 Decem ber 2010 xe OX L P Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5 0 Save and Reprint Jobs 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typograp
298. ption Additional options and features are displayed Program the required job features 0 Cne L Jatir Pan Select the Save Job for Reprint button on the Job Assembly tab Select the Save Job for Reprint option required e Copy 8 Save is used to store the job and print a copy of the job e Save Only stores the job without printing Select a folder location to store the job Select New Job Name and enter a name for the job using the keyboard Select Save to save the job name and return to the previous screen Load your originals into the document feeder and select Start to run the job The job is scanned and saved with the name entered in the folder selected If Copy amp Save was selected a copy of the job is also printed 1 2 For information about File Folder Management refer to Managing Folders page 194 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 189 Save and Reprint Jobs Saving a Job Using the Print Driver To store a job using the print driver 1 Open your document and select Print from the application s File menu The application Print window is displayed 2 Select the WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5 55 5 65 5775 5790 printer from the Printer Name drop down menu 3 Select Properties to access the print settings for the job 4 Select the Job Type drop down menu and select Saved Job T h e Sa ved Job 0 pti 0 n S a re di S p layed Paper Output Special Pages Image Options
299. ptions E mail Options The E mail Options allow you to temporarily change the Tee Tass mai onion a format of the E mail image file set a Reply To address and add a brief message To access the E mail Options select Services Home and E mail Then select the E mail Options tab File Name This feature enables you to name the file that is sent by E mail 1 Using the keyboard enter the name of the file BL File Name e Upto 50 alphanumeric characters can be entered T O O e To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the X button e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards 2 Select Save to save your selections and exit File Format The File Format determines the type of file created You can select the file format you wish to use for your scanned image The options are e PDF Portable Document Format allows recipients with the right software to view print or edit the file no ae eT matter what their computer platform e Image Only optimizes the file for viewing and 0 merone coon na none eg raenig printing and cannot be modified e Searchable runs the file through an Optical 20 Character Recognition OCR process This can take a few minutes but allows the text in the file to be searchable and editable If Searchable is selected the Document Language menu becomes available Select the appropriate language
300. questing that you perform the Xerographic Module R2 maintenance procedures When you open the front door further messages will tell you what to do Note You cannot use the device for printing or copying until you have completed this procedure Follow the instructions provided on the touch screen to complete the Xerographic Module R2 maintenance tasks If problems occur you may be required to initiate a Xerographic Module Cleaning cycle using the following instructions 1 Press the Machine Status button 3 xerographic Module Cleaning E 2 Select the Tools tab SEE Clearing 3 Select Device Settings and Xerographic Module Cleaning 4 Select Clean to initiate the cleaning cycle 5 Exit Tools Paper and Media Storage It is important for optimum printing that paper is stored correctly Take note of the following when storing media e Store at ambient temperature Damp paper may cause problems or poor image quality e Do not open reams of paper until they are required for use The ream wrapper contains an inner lining that protects the paper from moisture e Store ona flat surface to prevent the paper from folding or curling e Stack reams of paper carefully on top of one another to avoid crushing the edges Do not stack more than five reams on top of each other For problem free printing and copying observe the following when loading paper into the paper trays e Do not use folded or wrinkled papers e Do not load p
301. r Use to select energy saver mode perform a quick restart or to power down the device Language Use to select a different language for the touch screen options Dial Pause Use to insert a pause when dialing a fax number C Cancel Entry Cancels the previous entry made on the Numeric Keypad Control Panel Overview Control Panel Overview Services Home Provides access to the services available on the device Services Returns the display to the previous copy fax or scan feature screen when the Job Status screen or Machine Status screen is displayed Job Status Use to check the progress of active jobs or display detailed information about completed jobs Machine Status Use to check the device status the billing meters the status of consumables or print the user documentation and reports Use this button also when accessing the Tools mode Touch Screen Use to select programing features and display fault clearance procedures and general device information Log In Out Use to enter log in details and to log out Numeric Keypad Use to enter alphanumeric characters Help Displays help messages for device features WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started 16 Power On and Off Power On and Off Power On 1 Ensure that your device is connected to a suitable power supply and that the power cord is fully plugged in to the electrical outlet of the device 2
302. r Type use this option to select a type of paper or media tO ongnai Document Onentation use for the print job Use Automatically Select to enable the printer to select a type e Select by Tray use this option to select a specific tray for printing the job The printer only uses the paper in the selected tray even when more than one tray contains the same paper size and type Use Automatically Select to enable the printer to select a tray loaded with the size and type of paper selected for the job Advanced Paper Selection meee Select this option to display the Advanced Paper Selection screen If there is a bi directional connection to the printer the media loaded in each of the trays is shown Select the paper tray size color and type to use for printing If Pre Cut Tab is selected as the paper type the image will be shifted 13mm 0 5 to the right automatically Ensure the correct tab sequence and number of tabs are loaded for the job Note For information about loading different media refer to Media Types on page 233 of Paper and Media Transparency Separators Transparency Separators Paper Summary Select this option to display the Transparency Separators screen If 4 Ad 210x 237 mm this option is selected a blank or printed sheet is placed after each mes transparency The paper type for your job must be set to Transparency using the Other Type menu option e Select Blank Separators or Printe
303. r example If the IP Address is 192 168 100 100 enter the following into the URL field http 192 168 100 100 3 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP Address of your device print a configuration report For instructions refer to Print Reports on page 245 of Machine and Job Status 194 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Save and Reprint Jobs Managing Folders Select the Jobs option Select the Saved Jobs tab to access the folder options Select Create New Folder Input the name for the folder in the Name field As a normal user you are only able to create Public folders These are the other kind of folders you may see e The Public folder has been created by a user It can be used by any user and has no access authority limitations Any user can access modify and delete the documents in this folder e The Read Only folder is created by the System Administrator or a user as a Read Only Public folder Any user can print from the folder but documents cannot be deleted or modified gt The Private folder is created by a user only when the device is in Authentication mode The User marks the folder as Private and the folder is only visible to the Owner and the System Administrator When you have selected the appropriate Permissions select Apply The Folder is displayed in the Folders List Modify or Delete Fol
304. rable fault is a fault that can be cleared by the user There are three categories of Customer Clearable faults Low Level Fault this occurs when a subsystem has detected a customer clearable fault for example when a stapler runs out of staples The print and copy features are still operable but the stapler function is not Failure Fault this is declared when a Low Level Fault causes a major subsystem to become unavailable For example when a paper misfeed is detected the print and copy functions are made inoperable until the paper is cleared by the user Reset Fault this can be cleared by powering the device off then on again Status Messages Status Messages are informal messages that do not impact the device from functioning properly There are two categories of Status Messages Warning Messages are informational and usually have to do with replacing consumables The messages warn the local user of impending problems or actions that need to be taken to avoid a fault occurring For example if the Xerographic Module R2 is close to the end of its life the device displays a warning message that the unit needs to be replaced soon At this time the system sets a pre defined limit until a Customer Clearable fault is declared to change the Xerographic Module R2 Job Fault Messages indicate a fault with the job for example the required paper is unavailable If a job is paused because of a fault the user is required to take action to co
305. rated have been resolved the display is removed Fault Logs Fault information can be accessed using the Machine Status button Machine Status provides information about the device the status of the paper trays consumables and any current faults Usage counters are also available The Faults tab displays fault listings and the device error logs The faults are separated into All Faults Active Messages and Event Log e All Faults this option displays a list of any current faults on the device Each fault can be selected for further information and instructions e Active Messages this option displays a list of all the current fault messages associated with the current device status and faults e Event Log this is a log of the last 20 faults occurring on the device The fault code associated with each fault and the date and time a fault occurred is displayed It also displays the device image count at the time each fault occurred and any relevant paper or document size information 294 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Fault Clearance When a fault occurs a fault screen displays which provides recovery instructions Follow these instructions to clear the fault Paper Jams Any printed sheets removed will automatically be reprinted once the paper jam is cleared 1 The fault screen will indicate the location of the jam Use the green handles and knobs indica
306. ray is 250 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper Bypass Tray This tray is also standard on the device and is used for non standard printing media It can be used for media sizes in the range Ap SEF to A3 SEF 4 25x5 5 SEF to 11x17 SEF The capacity for this tray is 100 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper is a fully adjustable tray and is used for media sizes A5 LEF to A3 SEF 5 5x8 5 LEF to 11x17 SEF The capacity for this tray is 500 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper Paper Tray 2 This tray is standard on the device It 0 is a fully adjustable tray and is used for media sizes A5 LEF to A3 SEF 5 5x8 5 LEF to 11x17 SEF The capacity for this tray is 500 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper Paper Tray 3 This tray is standard on the device It is a dedicated tray and is set to a fixed size either A4 or 8 5x11 The capacity for this tray is 2000 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper Paper Tray 4 This tray is standard on the device It is a dedicated tray and is set to a fixed size either A4 or 8 5x11 The capacity for this tray is 1600 sheets of 75 gsm or 20 lb paper The trays automatically detect low media and out of media conditions A warning message is displayed on the screen when a tray requires loading Always use the information labels in each of the trays for guidance on loading orientations and maximum fill information 222 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Paper and Media Trays 1 and 2
307. read the file contents The device can have access to both an LDAP server and a Public Address Book If both are configured the user will be presented with the choice to use either address book to select E mail recipients Refer to the System Administrator Guide for further information about Address Books WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 215 Internet Services Properties Properties The Properties option contains all the settings setups and default values for installing and setting up the device These are protected by a user name and password and should only be 4 changed by your System El print bar 0 Administrator 4 Connectivity and Printing Contigured Pe Centigured Configured 216 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Internet Services Support Auld Bok Properice General U 55 51 ane Links Hra er Software Soltware Upgrades L tami aterian Sysiem Administrator Adiminigtrator het Admino pare not Phone Number System Adminisrater phone mot tat Location Sytem Saiminigrater lecater rst set SMart efoluticns bend information t 810 W Cudiomear Suppert mumier pot set Bachine Hodal WorkCentre 5755 wi Mulifatctien System Hama TPv4 Address 13 221 106 63 Pvt Addresa Link Local Location Dat Higar Fax Lire 1 D1 707553355
308. redefined List is selected if the file destination required is available in the drop down menu e Enter a Scan Destination is selected if you need to enter a new file destination for the scanned images e Enter a Server Fax Number use this option to enter a telephone number if the images are to be sent to a server fax e File Destination select the file destination required from the drop down menu e Friendly Name use to enter an appropriate name for the file destination WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 135 Workflow Scanning Creating Templates e Protocol IP Address and Port if entering a new destination for the scanned images select the protocol type and enter the address details e Document Path use to specify a path to the destination selected if required e Filing Policy use this option to determine how the device handles duplicate filenames e Rename New File use this option when you want the device to name the new file or folder with a unique name e Append to Existing File use this option to add the newly created scanned image file to an existing document with the same name as the document being scanned e This option is not available with Multi Page Tiff and PDF file format options e Overwrite Existing File the new file overwrites the existing file with the same name e Do Not Save the scanned images are not saved if a file with the same name exists e Add Date To Name this option appends a d
309. requirements within a job To access the Job Assembly options select Services Home and Workflow Scanning Then select the Job Assembly tab Build Job Use this feature to build a job that requires a different settings for each page or a segment of H You can select the appropriate settings to be some pages Some pages Various More than applied to individual pages or segments of a with text and 2 ne el sized 100 pages completed job First split the originals into KS with AUE ECE Ls photos sections for individual programing 1 Select Build Job on the Job Assembly tab 2 Switch on Build Job by selecting the On button and EITE select Save 2 oe on Delete All Segments Delete All Segments deletes the entina job 3 Select the options required for the first segment of the B Seles Ere Buie Job inate hao Koza i job 2 job 4 Load the first segment originals and press Start 5 Remove the first segment originals The Build Job screen displays the first segment in the list Delete All Segments deletes the current Build Job and returns you to the main Build Job screen Select the options required for the second segment Load the second segment originals and press Start Repeat these steps until all segments of your job have been programmed and scanned After the last segment has been scanned select End Build Job to indicate you have finished scanning and the job can be processed and completed
310. returns to the previous screen 252 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Device Settings The Device Settings are used to customize options which are specific to the device such as Energy Saver and Paper Tray settings Trouble Shooting General Select the General option to access the following settings gt Energy Saver on page 253 e Date amp Time page 254 e Audio Tones on page 254 e Entry Screen Defaults on page 254 e Measurements on page 255 Energy Saver The device is designed to be energy efficient and automatically reduces its power consumption after periods of inactivity This utility enables the Administrator to modify the time the device spends between standby low power and sleep modes e Intelligent Ready wakes up and sleeps automatically based on previous usage e Job Activated wakes up the device when activity is detected There are two modes Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode Enter the minutes required for each option or use one of the Auto Presets options e From Standby Mode to Low Power Mode enter a time between 1 and 120 minutes e From Low Power Mode to Sleep Mode enter a time between 10 and 120 minutes e Auto Presets these presets have been setup with recommended settings that comply with energy saving regulations To use one of the preset options select the option required The settings for the option are di
311. rial Safety Data information regarding your printer go to North America www xerox com msds European Union www xerox com environment_europe For the Customer Support Center phone numbers go to www xerox com office worldcontacts Product Recycling and Disposal USA amp Canada Xerox operates a worldwide equipment take back and reuse recycle program Contact your Xerox sales representative 1 800 ASK XEROX to determine whether this Xerox device is part of the program For more information about Xerox environmental programs visit www xerox com environment html If you are managing the disposal of your Xerox device please note that the device may contain lead mercury Perchlorate and other materials whose disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations The presence of these materials is fully consistent with global regulations applicable at the time that the device was placed on the market For recycling and disposal information contact your local authorities In the United States you may also refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site http www eiae org WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 317 Safety and Regulations Energy Program Compliance European Union WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC Some equipment may be used in both a domestic household and a professional business application Professional Business Environment Application of this symbol on your device is confirmation that you must di
312. rkflows which have been created using optional scanning applications Home Template this is the Scan to Home template and is available if you have entered your authentication log in details into the device Images are scanned to a destination specific to the logged in user Public Private Mailbox Templates enable users to scan images to public or private mailboxes which have been setup on the device using Internet Services You must give the mailbox folder a name and private mailboxes may also require a secure password WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning To use a template select the template required from the Template Destinations list To ensure the latest templates are available select Update Templates from the Advanced Settings tab Use the scroll bar to access templates not shown in the list There are several types of template available 124 Workflow Scanning Options Output Color Select the Auto Detect option in Output Color to automatically detect and match the color of your original and produce black and white grayscale or color output from your original The options are Auto Detect to select output that matches your original Black amp White to select black and white output regardless of the color of your original Grayscale to use gray scales instead of color Color to select color output from your original Note This feature may not be available on your device 2 Sided Scanni
313. rnet Services enables users to perform many functions including e Checking machine status billing information and consumable status e Submitting print jobs over the internet or intranet e Setting up the Public Address Book by importing an existing address book or by adding entries individually e Creating modifying and deleting Workflow Scanning templates e Customizing the device settings such as Energy Saver Paper Trays and Timeout Settings The Internet Services Help function describes all the features and functions available 208 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Internet Services Using Internet Services Using Internet Services Prior to connecting to Internet Services the device must be physically connected to the network with TCP IP and HTTP enabled An operational workstation with TCP IP Internet or Intranet accessibility is also required To access Internet Services Open the web browser from your Workstation In the URL field enter http followed BESTT by the IP Address of the device For example If the IP Address is 192 168 100 100 enter the following into the URL field RR Stan Address Book Properties Suoport http 192 168 100 100 Press Enter to view the Home page cS by The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP Address of your device print a configuration report For instructions refer to
314. rom the LDAP phonebook to a personal phonebook To access an LDAP phonebook bi directional communication must be set up and the phonebook must be configured on the device using Internet Services Refer to Help on the Preferences screen in your print driver for more information about importing exporting and creating Phonebooks User Preferences Select the User Preferences required e Prompt When Adding Duplicate Recipients provides a warning if the same recipient will be added twice e Prompt When Removing a Recipient provides a warning if deleting a recipient from the Fax Recipient list e Always Use Current Recipient List is used if you always send faxes to the same recipients This option eliminates the need to create a Recipient list each time you send a fax e Always Use Current Cover Sheet Notes always send faxes with the same message on the fax cover sheet This option eliminates the need to create a cover sheet message each time you send a fax 112 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax from PC Cover Sheet The Cover Sheet option enables you to add a cover sheet to your fax Select Print a Cover Sheet to send a cover sheet with your job The cover sheet options are displayed e Select the Recipient Information to print e Use Show Recipient Names to print the names of the recipients on the cover sheet gt Use Hide Recipient Names if you do not want the recipient names to print on the cover sheet
315. round each page Draw Page Borders prints a border around each page WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Print 164 Layout Watermark Watermark A watermark is a picture or text independent of that provided by the application that is printed on every page or the first page of the job The watermark options are provided in the drop down menu There are pre set watermarks listed available Draft Confidential and Copy Once a watermark is selected use the Options menu to select whether to print the watermark in the background in the foreground or blend with the job Also select whether to print the watermark on all pages or on the first page only Additional watermarks can be created using the New option The Watermark Editor screen is displayed with options for creating a new watermark e Name is used to enter a name for the watermark The name appears in the watermark selection menu under the Layout Watermark tab When creating a new watermark type a name that is no more than 255 characters e The Options pull down menu allows you to choose the type of watermark to create Select one of the following options gt Text uses the characters that you type in the Text field This is displayed in the document as the watermark gt Time Stamp uses a time stamp as the watermark Select whether to include the weekday date time and or time zone in the Time Stamp Format drop down list e Picture uses a picture
316. rovided in the Administration and Accounting guide and the System Administration Guide Contact your System Administrator for more details 248 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Machine and Job Status Version 2 0 December 2010 Xerox WorkCentre 5 735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 250 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Table of Contents 4 0 5 ee ee eee 252 AGCCSSSING TOOL osc 0 00 00 22 DEVICE 0 253 SCHON 0000000000 000000020 00000000 253 Paper Management 2 2 255 9 9999 257 TMCS 6 000 258 Output OPTIONS 2 00 a a a 259 Display BigATNESS E TEE EER 260 Xerographic Module Cleaning lt nnees 200 2 8 200 TOR Operation gt 2 2 20 a E a R 261 COnTOUIGTION RG DOIN secese eeri cieecad Howse
317. rporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 198 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 ID Card Copy 199 Table of Contents LPOG WICHIONN 002 2200002220 0000 0002 000020 ID OOY 40 0222220200 EE A 0 eenesaaeeaeN gt 2 8 Copying an ID CON os isos 0 0000 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 ID Card Copy Introduction Introduction ID Card Copy enables you to scan each side of an ID card onto one side of a single sheet of paper The ID card is placed on the document glass and the first side is scanned When prompted the card is turned over and the other side is scanned You can also set different image quality settings for side 1 and side 2 CO CAND 1 select the ID Card Copy service press the Services Home button 2 Select the ID Card Copy option Additional options and features are displ
318. rrange the images in the correct sequence on your selected media so that a booklet is created when the copy set is folded in half A cover can be inserted onto the booklet automatically refer to Covers on page 56 The options are Booklet Creation e Off select this option if you want your output layout to match your originals For example if your originals are already in a booklet layout e On select this option if you want the device to automatically reduce and arrange the images to create a booklet layout Finishing e Folded 8 Stapled will staple and fold the output along the center margin to produce booklets e Fold Only will fold the output along the center margin to produce booklets e None select this option if you do not want the device to fold and staple your output Tri Folded If the optional Tri fold Module is installed on your device a single sheet of A4 or 8 5x11 media ina weight range of 60 to 120 gsm 16 to 32 lb can be folded in a C Fold or Z Fold Originals must always be loaded Short Edge Feed SEF e CFold the page will be folded as shown Select Collated for sets or Uncollated for stacks a e ZFold the page will be folded as shown Select Collated for sets or Uncollated for stacks 8 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Copy Copy Options Finishing Devices Finishing Device Description Basic Office Finisher Holds up to 250 sheets of paper in the Top Tr
319. rrect the condition or to delete the job WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 293 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Fault Displays All faults that affect the users of the device are presented to the user by one of two methods Interrupting Fault Interrupting faults are presented if the associated fault affects the entire device where the device is not capable of accepting input or output They are also presented if the associated fault affects the currently selected document service but does not affect another service which can still be used The type of fault screen presented depends on the type of fault occurring Some fault displays present the user with fault recovery options A selection of buttons allow you to choose a fault recovery option When an interrupting fault window is displayed any status messages associated with the displayed fault are presented in the Status Message area Non Interrupting Fault Non Interrupting fault displays consist of messages displayed in the Status Message area They do not affect the successful completion of a job from the current pathway For example if the user is running a Copy job and a fault occurs with faxing then a non interrupting fault display is presented Both Interrupting and Non Interrupting fault displays are generated automatically by the device and are displayed in the fault logs Once the conditions which resulted in the fault display being gene
320. rther information refer to Job Status on page 241 of Machine and Job Status 192 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Save and Reprint Jobs Reprinting Saved Jobs Using Internet Services You can reprint your saved jobs using Internet Services Open the web browser from your Workstation In the URL field enter http followed BESTT by the IP Address of the device For example If the IP Address is 192 168 100 100 enter the following Internet Services F Samih Sp Famke 4 K into the URL field FR TTT R http 192 168 100 100 Press Enter to view the Home page The Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP Address of your device print a configuration report For instructions refer to Print Reports on page 245 of Machine and Job Status Select the Jobs tab x This screen shows the jobs currently in the device list To access the list of Saved Jobs select the Saved Jobs tab Select the folder that contains the job you want to print Select the check box next to the job you want to print You may choose several jobs and specify how many copies you would like Select Print Job from the drop down menu and then select Go Your selected job or jobs are printed at the device using the saved print setting for each job WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 193 Save and Reprint Jobs 1 2 Managing Fo
321. s can cause dry particles of glue to detach from the backing and should not be used Tabs are used as dividers in documents Your device can accommodate tabs with 1 to 10 tabs and weights of up to 200 gsm 53 lb bond Note Do not use tabs with bent corners They can cause feeding related problems If a tab is bent remove it from the set and replace it with an undamaged tab in the same position Use this media type for feeding heavyweight paper and card The maximum weight which can be fed is 216 gsm 56 lb bond Use this media type for paper which has a rough Surface Media Types Media Type Labels Pre Cut Tabs Heavyweight Rough Surface optional on some configurations 234 Paper and Media Storage and Handling Media Type Description Loading Instructions Envelopes The device supports Bypass Tray diamond banker pocket e Load envelopes face up The flaps should always and wallet envelopes be open and on the trailing edge Lightweight and medium weight are acceptable and envelope seals can be gummed or press and seal Optional Envelope Tray e The optional envelope tray is installed instead of Tray 2 Load envelopes into the envelope tray face down with the long edge of the envelope along the left side of the tray Place wallet type envelopes flap on the long side with the flap open and facing to the right of the The following envelope sizes are supported DL Wallet and C5
322. s the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections 3 Press the Services Home button and select the ID Card Copy option The ID Card Copy features are displayed Select the required enlargement or reduction 5 Select the paper tray required for the job The graphic on the screen changes to reflect the orientation of the output paper 6 Select the Side 1 Image Quality option and program the features required for side 1 Select the Side 2 Image Quality option and program the features required for side 2 7 Enter the copy quantity using the numeric keypad and press Start to scan side 1 of the ID card 8 Lift up the document feeder and turn over the ID card to enable side 2 to be scanned Close the document feeder 9 Press Start to scan side 2 of the ID card The job is processed and printed Retrieve your copies from the output tray If your job is held in the list it requires additional resources to print To identify the resources required select the Job Status button Select your job in the list and select Job Details Once the resources are available the job will print 204 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 ID Card Copy Version 2 0 Decem ber 2010 xe OX Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Internet Services 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States C
323. scanning a mix of sizes The options are e Auto Detect is the default setting and enables automatic size sensing The size detected is matched to a standard size paper e Pre set Scan Areas allows you to define the size of your original from a list of pre set standard document sizes You can view the list by using the scroll bar e Custom Scan Areas is used to enter a specific area for scanning Measure the area to be scanned on the original and enter the X and Y axis measurements into the fields provided Only the area specified is scanned e Mixed Size Originals allows you scan documents containing different size pages The pages must be the same width like A4 LEF and A3 SEF 8 5x11 LEF and I 11x17 SEF other combinations are shown on the screen The device will detect the size of the documents and determine whether the receiving fax machine can support the various paper sizes If the receiving fax cannot support the page sizes the image is reduced or enlarged to fit Select Save to save your selections and exit 98 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Server Fax Fax Options The Fax Options allow you to specify a specific time for sending your fax To access the Fax Options select Services Home and Server Fax Then select the Fax Options tab Delay Send Select Delay Send to specify the time within the next 24 hours that you want the fax to be transmitted Use this feature to transmit fa
324. select again to turn the mask data off Characters between the symbols will appear as e Wait for Dial Tone suspends dialing until an expected network tone is detected It can also be used to detect a specific tone when accessing an outside line or other service e Begin DTMF Starts a sequence of DTMF Dual Tone Multi frequency characters e End DTMF Ends a sequence of DTMF Dual Tone Multi frequency characters e Start Mailbox Signalling pauses regular fax dialing and starts DTMF Dual Tone Multi frequency procedure for the fax mailbox e Optional Readability Characters Space these are used for readability purposes but do not affect the number entered For example if you wish to identify the area code of a fax number use the Readability Characters 1234 567890 74 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax If more than one fax line is available the following characters are also available e Line 1 gt 1 lt selects line 1 to dial the number Using the line selection identifier temporarily overwrites the fax settings and is for the current job only e Line 2 gt 2 lt selects line 2 to dial the number Using the line selection identifier temporarily overwrites the fax settings and is for the current job only 3 When you have entered the fax number and dialing characters required select Add to add the number to the Recipient list 4 Select Close to return to the fax options
325. sided or 2 sided The second side can be rotated Original Type is used to define the original document as text text and photo or photo Scan Presets is used to set the scan settings to suit how the scanned image will be used Press Start to scan the originals and process the Workflow Scanning job Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed The Workflow Scanning job enters the job list ready for filing The scanned images are then filed to the location specified on the template ready for retrieval by the user 1 For information about additional Workflow Scanning features refer to Workflow Scanning Options on page 123 of Workflow Scanning WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 27 Getting Started Sending an E mail Sending an E mail 1 Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray Adjust the guide to touch the documents Lift up the document feeder Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top right rear corner Close the document feeder 2 Press the Clear All AC button once to cancel any previous screen programing selections 3 Press the Services Home button and select the E mail option The E mail features are displayed Hew Recipient Note To use E mail encryption and signing ensure ao that you are logged in at the machine E Reply To Select New Recipients g ren 5 Select
326. simile has been approved in accordance with the Council Decision 1999 5 EC for pan European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network PSTN However due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries the approval does not of itself give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network terminal point In the event of a problem you should contact your authorized local dealer in the first instance This device has been tested to and is compliant with ES 203 021 1 2 3 a specification for terminal equipment for use on analogue switched telephone networks in the European Economic Area This device provides a user adjustable setting of the country code Refer to the customer documentation for this procedure Country codes should be set prior to connecting this device to the network Note Although this device can use either loop disconnect pulse or DTMF tone signaling it is recommended that it is set to use DTMF signaling DTMF signaling provides reliable and faster call setup Modification of this device connection to external control software or to external control apparatus not authorized by Xerox will invalidate its certification 316 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Safety and Regulations Material Safety Data South Africa This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device Material Safety Data For Mate
327. size for the job deselect the checkbox and use the drop down menu Booklet Margins e Booklet Margins control whether the Booklet Layout feature fits the virtual pages into the printable area of the sheet or into the full physical size of the sheet e Standard ensures the entire image fits on two pages per sheet even if the original document has little or no white space around the edges e None assumes the original document has enough white space around all the borders to fit two pages per sheet for example if printing two 8 5x11 images on 11x17 paper or two A4 images on A3 paper Gutter gt Use this option to shift the images to create a center margin for the booklet gt This option provides space for the booklet center fold e Specify the horizontal distance in points between the page images A point is 1 72 or 35 mm Creep e This option gradually shifts the images throughout the document providing less shift in the center of the booklet and more shift to the outer pages of the booklet This is useful for booklets with more than 10 pages e Setting the Creep compensates for the thickness of the folded paper which otherwise might cause the page images to shift slightly outward when folded e Specify how much the page images are shifted outward in 10ths of a point Note Some media types sizes and weights cannot be stapled punched or folded Refer to www xerox com for specifications information WorkC
328. sleek system It is designed to support large workgroups in different office environments You can do more with less and streamline your workflow with these productivity enhancing features for example e Online address books e Customization to meet own work processes e Powerful documentation features for example Booklet Creation Special Pages Build Job and Annotations To maximize job productivity use the Job Status button to access the Active jobs list and manage your jobs If a job is urgent use the Promote option to prioritize your jobs If a job is Held in the list it may require additional resources or a secure code to print The reason for the held status is displayed on the Job Progress screen Once the requirement has been met or the correct secure code entered the job is released for printing For further information about customizing or using your device refer to Tools on page 252 of Administration and Accounting WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 33 Getting Started Maintenance and Consumables Maintenance and Consumables There are several consumables on the device that need replenishing or replacing such as paper staples and customer replaceable units To place an order for Xerox consumables please contact your local Xerox Representative giving your company name product number and the machine serial number For information about locating the serial number please refer to Machine Information on pag
329. splayed in the entry boxes WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 253 Administration and Accounting Device Settings Date amp Time Some features and functions on the device require the local date and time such as Annotations Delay Send or the Configuration report This utility enables you to set and change the local date and time on the device e Time Zone use this option to set the difference between your local time and Greenwich Mean Time Select the correct Time Zone for the location of the device using the drop down menu e Date select the Format required and enter the Month Day and Year e Time enter the correct Hour and Minutes and select PM or AM If a 24 hour clock is required select the 24 hour clock option and enter the Hour and Minutes using the 24 hour clock format e Select Save or Reboot to save or Cancel to exit without saving Audio Tones The device generates three types of audio tones to notify the user of an event that has occurred at the device Use this feature to switch off or adjust the volume of each of the tones e Fault Tone sounds when there is a fault on the device Select High Medium Low or Off Use the Test option to hear the tone selected e Conflict Tone sounds when an incorrect touch screen selection has been made Select High Medium Low or Off Use the Test option to hear the tone selected e Selection Tone sounds when the device acc
330. spose of this device in compliance with agreed national procedures In accordance with European legislation end of life electrical and electronic equipment subject to disposal must be managed within agreed procedures Domestic Household Environment Application of this symbol on your device is confirmation that you should not dispose of the device in the normal household waste stream In accordance with European legislation end of life electrical and electronic equipment subject to disposal must be segregated from household waste Private households within EU member states may return used electrical and electronic equipment to designated collection facilities free of charge Please contact your local disposal authority for information In some member states when you purchase new device your local retailer may be required to take back your old device free of charge Please ask you retailer for information Prior to disposal please contact your local dealer or Xerox representative for end of life takeback information It be Energy Program Compliance All Markets ENERGY STAR The Xerox WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 is ENERGY STAR qualified under the ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment Sa The ENERGY STAR and ENERGY STAR MARK are registered United States trademarks The ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is a team effort between U S European Union and Japanese governments and the office equi
331. ss the Services Home button and select the E mail option The E mail features are displayed Hew Recipient Note To use E mail encryption and signing ensure ao that you are logged in at the machine E Reply To Select New Recipients g ren 5 Select To Cc or Bcc for the recipient using the drop _ Ts down menu to the left of the entry box LI Sides Using the keyboard enter the E mail address e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered gt To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the button gt Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards Select Add to add the E mail address to the Recipient list Continue adding E mail addresses until all the recipients have been added to the list then select Close All the recipients are displayed in the Recipient list Note If E mail encryption is enabled E mails may only be sent to recipients that have a valid Encryption certificate Encryption ensures that the message cannot be read by anybody except the intended recipient In addition with E mail signing enabled the recipient can be sure that the message has actually come from the person marked as the sender If an address book has been setup enter the name of the recipient and select Search A list of matching recipients is displayed Select the E mail address required and select Add To Add Cc or Add Bcc from the drop down menu T
332. ssage required e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be E entered gt To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the X button e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards 2 Select Save to save your selections and exit WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 173 E mail E mail Reply To The Reply To feature enables you to include an E mail address you want the recipient to reply to For example you can enter your personal E mail address If you logged in through authentication and your details are available in the Address Book your E mail address is displayed 1 Using the keyboard enter the message required e Upto 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered gt To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the button gt Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards If an address book has been setup enter the name required and select Search A list of matching names is displayed Select the E mail address required and select Save 2 If required select Save to save your selections and exit The E mail address entered is displayed in the Reply To field From To enter or edit the sender s name 1 Select From 2 Ifa default name is displayed select the X button to delete the entry 3 Using the keyboard enter the E mail address of the sender e Upto 128 a
333. sscode select Secure Saved Job and enter the passcode required This passcode is required to print the job Note To save jobs on the printer Job Storage must be enabled in the Installable Options screen e Fax use this option to send the current job as a Fax from PC job The job is sent from the PC to the printer over the network then cover sheet Ootone faxed over a telephone line to the specified fax destination Fax Number Organization When you select this job type the Fax screen is displayed so you can specify the fax recipients and specify other fax settings For more information refer to Fax from PC on page 109 of Fax Note To fax your job the fax option must be installed on your printer and fax must be enabled in the Installable Options screen 154 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Print Paper Output Paper This option displays information about the paper to use for the print job such as size and type To change the paper to use for printing select the Paper drop down menu The options are e Other Size select this option to display the Paper Size screen Ee Select the paper size and scaling amount required ut Paper Size e Other Color use this option to select a paper color for the print 5 4 opion job Select a color from the drop down menu Use Automatically Select to enable the printer to select a paper color Center A4 210 x 297 mm e Othe
334. st image quality for graphics and photos e Fine 200 dpi is recommended for line art and photos This is the best choice in most cases e Superfine 600 dpi is recommended for photos and halftones or images that have gray tones It requires more communication time but produces the best image quality 114 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Fax from PC Send Time This is sometimes called Delayed Send Use this feature to transmit faxes during off peak hours or when sending to another country or time zone The default setting will send the fax immediately To send the fax at a specific time in the next 24 hours select Send At and either type in or use the arrow buttons to choose the local time that you want the fax sent Fax Dialing Options Use if you need to add an external access number a country code or an area code to the recipient number or if a credit card number is required e Select Dialing Prefix if you need to add for example an external access number a country code or an area code to the recipient number you have selected on the recipients screen e Select Credit Card if you want to bill the call to a credit card WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 115 Fax Receiving a Fax Receiving a Fax All incoming faxes are submitted to the Active Jobs list as fax jobs and can be set up to print immediately or be held in the job list until a secure passcode is entered If the Fax ser
335. stomize the Document Feeder Size Sensing place the document in the document feeder in the correct orientation and adjust the guides e Select the Document Feeder Size Sensing feature The screen displays the default document size detected gt To change the document size select the size you require from the list If the size required is not available select the Custom Size button and enter the size required When you have entered the size of the document select Save Remove the document from the document feeder and then place it back in again The device should detect the size of your document and display it on the screen 262 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Service Settings The Service Settings are used to customize options which are specific to individual services such as Copy Fax or Print Feature Defaults es le Reduce Esra Presets Fax Settings Select the Feature Defaults option to access the following settings g 0 Gard Copy Sevice Seting gt Set Fax Defaults on page 263 e Set Copy Defaults on page 263 e Set ID Card Copy Defaults on page 263 Set Fax Defaults Use to select the default settings for each programing feature within the Fax service such as 2 Sided Scanning Original Type and Resolution e Select the default required for each feature in each of the programing tabs e Select End Defaults The settings selected b
336. t is recommended that you work through your document and identify the page numbers where inserts are required prior to programing This option is also used if pre printed or blank tabs are required in the job For further information about loading tabs refer to Media Types on page 233 of Paper and Media To add an insert select the Add Inserts button above the table ee 1 Using the Inserts Options drop down menu select whether the TE re insert is to be placed Before Page 1 or select After Page s to E place inserts after the specified page numbers Note To add an insert to the front of your document use the ages Before Page 1 option Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas lt For example 1 3 2 2 Select the number of insert sheets required 3 Specify the page number before each insert If multiple inserts are required it is recommended you enter all the page numbers separated by a comma or enter a page range separated by a Paper dash Job Settings A4 210 297 mm 4 Select the Paper requirements for the inserts and select OK White Pinter Default Type If using tab media for your insert ensure the correct tab sequence and number of tabs are loaded for the job Note If using tab media for your blank or pre printed inserts refer to Media Types on page 233 of Paper and Media All the inserts programed display in the table 5 If any inserts have individual pro
337. t the image contrast The options are Background Suppression This enhances originals that have colored backgrounds by reducing or eliminating the background from your original This option is useful when your original is on colored paper e Select Auto Suppression to automatically suppress unwanted background e Select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature off particularly when gt The Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals e The original has a gray or colored border such as a certificate e You want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 105 Fax Internet Fax Contrast The Contrast feature controls the image density on the output and compensates for an original that has too much or too little contrast on the image e Select Manual Contrast to set the level of contrast yourself Move the indicator towards the High setting to reproduce more vivid blacks and whites for sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures Move the indicator towards the Low setting to reproduce more detail in light and dark areas of the original Select Save to save your selections and exit Resolution The Resolution affects the appearance of the scanned image A higher resolution produces a better quality image A lower resolution reduces communication time The options are e 72 dpi reco
338. tch Send refer to Batch Send on page 75 of Fax e Disable switches off the function gt Enable activates the Batch Send option Note If Batch Send is enabled and a delay send job is programmed any subsequent fax jobs programmed to send to the same destination will automatically be added to the batch and delayed until the scheduled time Fax Country Setting Use this option to select the country the device is located in Reboot the device after setting this option e Select the Country required from the options shown WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 267 Administration and Accounting Service Settings Incoming Fax Defaults This setting allows you to select the default options for incoming faxes Auto Answer Delay This setting allows you to set a time delay before the device responds to a call This is particularly useful if the device is attached to a shared telephone line e Enter the time delay required between 0 and 15 seconds Junk Fax Prevention This setting enables you to prevent the receipt of unwanted junk faxes This is done by only allowing the receipt of faxes from numbers held in the individual directory e Disabled switches off the Junk Fax Prevention option e Enabled allows only faxes sent from numbers held in the individual directory to be received Note Faxes sent from numbers not entered into the individual directory will not be received Receive Printing Mode The feature determi
339. ted in the instructions displayed on the screen to remove the jammed paper 2 Ensure that all jam clearance handles and levers are returned to their correct positions The red flashes behind the jam clearance handles and levers should not be visible Note Jam Clearance areas vary depending on your device model and configuration Document Jams 1 Remove all the documents from the document feeder and document glass as instructed 2 Re order the documents as at the start of the job and reload The documents will be recycled automatically to recover the job 3 If you are unable to clear the fault refer to Troubleshooting Tips on page 296 for further information If you are still unable to resolve the problem refer to Further Assistance on page 300 for instructions on how to contact the Xerox Support Center WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 295 General Care and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Tips If you are experiencing difficulties using your device check the suggestions below for problem solving advice Problem Potential Solution The device will not power on Check to see that the device is not in Energy Saver mode as indicated by the green light on the control panel Touch the User Interface screen to re activate Press the ON OFF button Check to see if the power cord is correctly installed Documents will not feed Ensure that all staples or paper clips have been removed from the thro
340. the More button to access further options not on the main screen Images from originals placed on the document glass can be enlarged or reduced by any ratio between 400 and 25 Images from originals fed through the document feeder can be enlarged or reduced by any ratio between 200 and 25 gt Use the arrow buttons on the Copy screen to select the required reduction or enlargement percentage e Alternatively select the ratio button 100 and use the numeric keypad to type in the ratio required e Set the ratio window to 100 if you want your output image to be the same size as your original e Other options are listed below including A3 to A4 reduction Auto and More Proportional Selections made on this screen will reduce or enlarge the image by the same ratio in both directions so that the image gets bigger or smaller but the proportions remain the same e Select the Variable button 100 and use the R Reduce Enlarge vedo 6 sow numeric keypad or the arrow buttons to enter the ratio varia Presets XY required Proportional ma 100 oe stb eo Independant XY 7 f Au 129 85 gt 119 gt Use the Presets buttons to select 100 Auto or commonly used ratios which can be set up by your Administrator The selected proportional ratios in percentages are shown next to the button 2 154 BR 147 TEKET When Auto is selected the device chooses the best ratio to reduce or
341. tible when the resolution is set to 200 dpi e PDF A is an industry standard format for long term document preservation based on the PDF format The Advanced Settings may need checking to ensure they are appropriate for extended use e XPS XML Paper Specification given the right software the recipient of the scanned image can view print or edit the file no matter what their computer platform Select Save to save your selections and exit 132 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Workflow Scanning Filing Options If File Already Exists This option is used to determine how the device handles duplicate filenames A if File Already Exists Rename New Fip Add Date to Nama e Rename New File use this option when you want the device to name the new file or folder with a unique name oe Appand io Existing Fil e Overwrite Exiating File e Add Date To Name this option appends a date and r time stamp to the filename e Append to Existing File use this option to add the newly created scanned image file to an existing document with the same name as the document being scanned Note This option is not available with Multi Page Tiff and PDF file format options e Overwrite Existing File the new file overwrites the existing file with the same name e Do Not Save the scanned images are not saved if a file with the same name exists Select Save to save your selections and exit Document Management
342. ting Started Power On and Off Energy Saver The device is designed to be energy efficient and automatically reduces its power consumption after periods of inactivity The System Administrator can set up Energy Saver options The Energy Saver button on the control panel causes the Power Down options to be displayed To activate Energy Saver mode use the instructions below Press the Energy Saver button on the control panel The Power Down options are displayed Select Energy Saver The device will immediately enter Low Power mode If Sleep mode has been configured the device will then enter Sleep mode after a specified period of time The Energy Saver button is illuminated when the device is in Energy Saver mode A steady light indicates the device is in Low Power mode A flashing light indicates the device is in Sleep Mode To re activate the device when in Low Power or Sleep mode touch a button on the touch screen or control panel The device takes longer to recover from Sleep mode 1 For information about setting up the Energy Saver options refer to the System Administrator Guide WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started 18 Loading Paper Loading Paper Open the required paper tray e Paper Trays 1 and 2 are fully adjustable for all media sizes between A5 and A3 5 5x8 5 and 11x17 e Paper Trays 3 and 4 are dedicated paper trays which are set to hold either A4 or 8 5 x11 LEF paper e
343. tion option required prior to selecting the required Hole Punched Stapled option The options are e Hole Punched Only select this option to hole punch your sets or stacks on the left edge Copy Output Dina Options e 1 Staple select this option to hole punch your sets and J add a single staple Select the location required for the LJ staple 9 area Ba eee UR S e 2 Staples select this option to hole punch your sets or stacks and add two staples Select the edge required for the staples Booklet If your device is fitted with the High Volume Finisher with Booklet Maker you can use the Booklet feature to automatically produce folded and stapled booklets The following Booklet Maker specifications apply e Paper Sizes A3 11x17 A4 8 5x11 8 5x13 and 8 5x14 e Paper weight 60 to 216 gsm 16 to 57 lb e All media must be Short Edge Feed SEF e Booklet thickness e For Folded and Stapled booklets a maximum of 15 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb or equivalent thickness For example you can have 13 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb and a cover sheet of 160 gsm 43 lb e For Folded Only booklets a maximum of 5 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb or equivalent thickness For example you can have 3 sheets of 80 gsm 20 lb and a cover sheet of 200 gsm 53 lb WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 47 Copy Copy Options Using the Booklet Creation On option the device will scan your originals and automatically reduce and a
344. tion report can be it printed This provides information about your device System Configuration including the serial number IP Address device Bi i ae a cee e et nl configuration and the software version It also provides e vero and dataen eoume TTT details of the last 20 faults and the number to call for assistance Select Print Report to print the System Configuration report The report is sent to the job list processed and printed WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 245 Machine and Job Status Machine Status Machine Hardware Options This option displays a list of the Services or additional solutions which have been installed on your device Use the scroll bar to access the entire list Machine Hardware Options Forsiy Interface Dec Machine Software Versions This option displays the software version of each of the device components This information may be required by a Xerox Representative for trouble shooting purposes or Scanner and Image Processor when software upgrades are performed TERME User interlace Machine Software Versions Network Gontroder Documenti Pepi Tray 5 Faults The Faults tab displays fault listings and the device error lt gt k logs The faults are separated into All Faults Active Messages and Event Log All Faults This option displays a list of current faults on the device Each fault can be selected for further informatio
345. to be kept of all Copy jobs so that costs can be charged to different departments or customers Limits can be set on the number of impressions allowed by each account holder To setup and manage the Auditron the System Administrator uses the Tools login User Name and Password WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 275 Administration and Accounting Accounting Enabling and Initializing the Auditron To setup the Auditron you must first select the mode of authentication you require then the Auditron must be initialized 1 Press the Machine Status button 2 Select the Tools tab To have access to all the Tools options you must be logged in as an Administrator 3 Tolog in select the Log In Out button on the control panel 4 Use the keyboard to enter your User Name then select the Next button Use the keyboard to enter your Password then select the Enter button Note The default user name and password are admin and 1111 The Tools options are displayed 5 Touch Accounting Settings then touch Accounting Mode 6 Inthe Auditron area touch the On button 7 Touch Save The Auditron is enabled and ready to initialize Note The Auditron cannot be enabled if the Save Job for Reprint feature is installed and enabled 8 Select Accounting Settings and Internal Auditron Setup iana Andiron Setup 9 Select Auditron Initialization The Auditron Sec Suing Initialization screen gives access to three types of
346. to images that contain Mixed Raster Content WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 1 Workflow Scanning Scan to Mailbox Scan to Mailbox Scan to Mailbox allows you to scan hard copy originals and store them on the device for later retrieval To use Scan to Mailbox you can use a default public folder or create a private folder using Internet Services If creating a private folder you must enter folder a name and may be required to enter a secure password The default public folder and any private folders which have been setup are displayed on the device under the templates list To store images in a folder select the folder required and scan your images If a private folder is selected a password may be requested The scanned images can then be retrieved at your PC by accessing Internet Services and selecting the folder required If a private folder is selected a password may be required You can then print your scanned documents or download them to your PC The Workflow Scanning option needs to be installed before this feature can be used but it is NOT necessary for the Workflow Scanning repositories and templates to be configured Creating a Private Folder To create a private folder Open the web browser from your Workstation In the URL field enter http followed BE Sr by the IP Address of the device For a a example If the IP Address is 192 168 100 100 enter the following into t
347. ton and select On 2 Select the To field and enter the name of the recipient using the keyboard e Upto 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered gt To delete a character use the backspace key or to clear the entire entry select the button e Use the Keyboards button to access additional language keyboards 3 Select the From field and enter the name of the sender using the keyboard 4 Select the comment required from the list E Cover Letter If a customized comment is required select a spare comment slot and select Edit Enter the text required ka using the keyboard then select Save vda 5 Todelete a comment from the list select the comment and select Clear A confirmation screen is displayed select Clear 6 Select Save to save your selections and exit Address Book The Address Book is used to store individual fax numbers or groups of fax numbers which are used frequently Up to 200 individual entries and 40 Group entries can be stored For each number stored transmission settings can also be set The Address Book can be accessed from all screens where a fax number requires entering Use the following instructions to set up and use Individual or Group entries Using the Address Book If numbers have been entered into the Address Book they can be accessed via the Address Book button 1 Select the Address Book button A list of Individuals entered in the Address Book is displayed by default To a
348. tton to add yourself automatically to the recipient list Note The Add Me button is not visible when the Only Send to Self feature is enabled by the system administrator 6 Enter the Message Reply To From and Subject details as required 28 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started Sending an E mail 7 Select the required features for your E mail using the touch screen P Output Color is used to replicate the original colors or to change the output to black and white grayscale or color Note This feature may not be available on your device 2 Sided Scanning is used to select whether your originals are 1 sided or 2 sided The second side can be rotated Original Type is used to define the original document as text text and photo or photo Scan Presets is used to set the scan settings to suit how the scanned image will be used 8 Press Start to scan your originals and process the E mail job Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed Note The E mail job enters the job list ready for sending 9 Select Job Status to view the job list and check the status of your job For information about additional E mail features refer to Sending an E mail on page 171 of E mail WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 29 Getting Started Saving Jobs for Reprinting Saving Jobs for Reprinting Load your documents face up in the document feeder
349. uent jobs continue to be processed and printed a held job does not hold up other jobs in the list The reason for the held status is displayed on the Job Progress screen e Receiving the device is receiving the job through a network transmission e Deleted the job has been deleted from the job list e Completed with Errors the job was completed with errors WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 241 Machine and Job Status Job Status e Select All Jobs and use the drop down list to filter the jobs and display only Copy Print and Fax Received Jobs or Scan Jobs and Fax Sent Jobs which are active on the device Held Jobs If the system administrator has set the machine to Hold All Jobs in a Private Queue or Hold All Jobs in a Public Queue the Held Jobs tab displays a list of folders containing print jobs that have been submitted from an identified user Unidentified jobs are held in the Unidentified Jobs tab Note If the Hold All Jobs feature is disabled the Held Jobs tab becomes the Secure Print Jobs tab and lists folders containing identified secure print jobs Up to 150 folders can be displayed The Owner and Jobs for each folder is shown e Select the Job Status button on the control panel The Active Jobs list is displayed e Select Held Jobs The list of held job folders is displayed Use the scroll bar to access all the folders in the list e Ifthe machine has been set to Hold All Jobs ina
350. ugh the document feeder originals Ensure the document feeder is not overloaded The document feeder can hold 75 sheets 35 model only or 100 sheets all other models of 80 gsm 20 lb paper Use Build Job if you have more originals than this Check to see if the document set is fully inserted into the document feeder Ensure that the edge guides are adjusted to touch the sides of the originals Ensure that the document feeder Feed Head is installed correctly Open the top cover and push feed head down into position Check for obstructions or paper debris in the document feeder Ensure that the document feeder cover is closed Check that the device is Ready as indicated by a message on the touch screen Repeated paper jams misfeeds Ensure that the correct paper size is displayed on the touch screen or multisheet feeds Ensure that the paper tray is not filled above the MAX line Ensure that the edge guides are adjusted to touch the sides of the paper If the problem is not resolved check for obstructions where paper enters the device Paper Jams inside the device Check the Paper Path for obstructions Ensure all the handles and levers are in the correct home position The red flashes behind the jam clearance handles and levers should not be visible Follow the instructions displayed on the touch screen Flip the paper over in the paper tray Check the paper tray Edge Guides to see if they are against the edges of the paper
351. umber using the keyboard and select Save To delete an incorrect character entry use the backspace key or to delete the entire entry select the X button Select Save to save the entry and exit Software Reset This utility provides the facility to reset the device software without switching off and switching on the device Reset System Software resets the copier system software Network Software resets the network controller software Reset Both resets the whole system software WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Administration and Accounting 284 Version 2 0 December 2010 Xerox WorkCentre 5 735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 General Care and Troubleshooting 2011 Xerox Corporation All Rights Reserved Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without permission of Xerox Corporation XEROX and XEROX and Design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document version 2 0 December 2010 286 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 General Care and Troubleshooting Table of Contents 208 0 200002 0200000 2 2 0 208 9 200 0701112211 Cleaning the Device
352. until you release he sone poi he Kaip batien in iie the job using the same passcode entered when the job was eae submitted Note If multiple secure jobs are held in the list that require the same secure code the code will only need to be entered once to allow any or all of the jobs to be released for printing Sample Set prints one copy of the job as a sample and holds the remaining copies in the job list at the printer Once you have checked the sample set you can release the remaining sets for printing or delete the job if no longer required WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 153 Print Paper Output e Delay Print use this option to enter a specific time to print the RR job This is useful for large jobs or if you want all your jobs to print at the same time When you select this job type the Delay Print screen is displayed Enter the time required and submit the job The job remains in the job list until the specified time for printing e Saved Job stores the job on the printer s hard drive so that it re can then be printed on demand when required or printed from M Os 2 Save and Pri Internet Services E IS Job Name The job is assigned a name and Save only or Save and Print o E can be selected The Folder for storing the job is also specified perse P This determines whether the job is available to other users orin amp Msecure Saved Job a private folder ma ee If the job requires a pa
353. urun L Cater ran L 9 es Bypass 2 1 Skind L gt Rotate Side 2 4 Select the required features using the touch screen so 4 Reduce Enlarge can be used to reduce or enlarge the image by 25 to 400 4 Paper Supply is used to select the required tray and size of paper for the copy output 2 Sided Copy is used to produce 1 or 2 sided copy output i Te Copy Output is used to select collate staple or fold options depending on the finishing J device available 5 Enter the copy quantity using the numeric keypad and press Start to scan the originals 6 Remove the originals from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed Note The Copy job enters the job list ready for printing 7 Select Job Status to view the job list and check the status of your job If your job is held in the list it requires additional resources to print To identify the resources required select the job and select Job Details Once the resources are available the job will print For information about additional Copy features refer to Copy Options on page 44 of Copy For information about copying an ID card refer to Copying an ID Card on page 204 of ID Card Copy WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 21 Getting Started Printing a Document Printing a Document 1 Ensure that the correct Xerox print driver has been installed on your PC To install the print drivers refer to the System Administrator Guide
354. ution Double image or show through Check the quality of the original ghosting Clean the document glass if it is being used Rotate the original 180 degrees and try the job again The device cannot sense the Use Original Size to specify the size of the original refer to Original Size size of the original on the glass on page 52 of Copy Rescan the original leaving the cover raised Jobs scan but do not print Some jobs require image processing before printing This may take as long as 2 seconds per page Press the Job Status button and check the Active Jobs list to determine if a job is processing There may be a job in the list with a status of paused Delete this job if it remains in the state over 3 minutes This may possibly be a result of an incorrect feature combination The software may need to be reset Refer to Software Reset on page 284 of Administration and Accounting Output does not reflect the Press Clear All between jobs selections made on the touch If a Save button displays on the touch screen ensure Save is selected screen after each selection The image is reduced ona e Confirm the original size of the documents Documents may be reduced transmission on the available paper supply at the receiving fax machine The device does not answer e Change the Auto Answer Delay setting to 0 seconds Refer to Auto incoming fax calls Answer Delay on page 268 of Administration and Accounting The device answers incomin
355. ve Remote Polling Enter the fax numbers of the devices which are being O polled Use Add to add more than one number tothe A list Use the Speed Dial or Address Book option to adda Specific number from the directory If required use Delay Send to program a specific time to poll the remote machine Refer to Delay Send on page 85 for more information Select Start to commence polling 1 4 The remote device is polled and the retrieved document printed Poll Remote Mailbox The Poll Remote Mailbox feature allows you to call a remote machine which has a mailbox setup The call locates and retrieves the faxes stored within the mailbox The mailbox number and passcode must be known Select the Poll a Remote Mailbox button Select the Fax Number entry field and enter the fax number of the device being polled using the numeric keypad Use the Address Book option to add the number if required 75 Poll Remote Mailbox Use the Dialing Characters option to enter the number if special characters are required Refer to Dialing Characters on page 74 for more information Select the Mailbox Number entry field and enter the mailbox number between 001 and 200 Select the Mailbox Passcode entry field and enter the 4 digit mailbox passcode Select Start to commence polling the mailbox 1 2 The remote device mailbox is polled and the retrieved document printed WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 89 Fax
356. ver printing preferences 4 Select Fax as the Job Type on the Paper Output screen of the print driver The Fax screen will automatically open This screen sossa mage Onions Layout Wstemac 2 Sided Printing displays the recipients for the current fax You can Nea Piri ac T Sided Pin now Add Fax Recipients or Add From Phonebook Output Destination Automatically Select Saved Settings frets 5 Toaddanew recipient select the Add Recipient button 6 Input the name and fax number of the recipient Complete the cover sheet Options additional information Select the Save to Personal Phonebook option if you want to add the recipient to your Personal Phonebook Fax Number Organization The Fax window has various tabs that contain options and properties gt Use the Cover Sheet tab to add a covering letter to your fax gt Use the Options tab to enable a confirmation sheet choose a specific send speed or select the resolution for the fax You can also select the Send Time option to enter a specific time to transmit the fax LZ 7 Choose the options required for your fax job and click OK to send the document Your fax will be submitted to the device job list ready to be transmitted For information about additional Fax from PC features refer to Fax from PC Options on page 111 of Fax 26 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Getting Started
357. verifies that the correct number has been dialled e Wait for Network Tone W suspends dialing until an expected network tone is detected It can also be used to detect a specific tone when accessing an outside line or other service e Optional Readability Characters and these characters are used for readability purposes and do not affect the number entered For example if you wish to identify the area code of a fax number you can use the space readability character 01234 567890 When you have entered the fax number and dialing characters required select Add to add the number to the Recipient list Select Close to return to the fax options 1 2 2 Sided Scanning The 2 Sided Scanning option allows you to set whether 1 or 2 sides of your original document are scanned Documents must first be loaded in the document feeder to enable the 2 Sided option The options are 1 Sided is used if your original documents are single sided 2 Sided is used if your original documents are double sided The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option 2 Sided Rotate Side 2 select if your original opens up like a calendar WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax 94 Server Fax Original Type Use this option to define the type of original to be used for scanning Making the correct selection enhances the quality of your output image The options are e Photo amp Text is recommended for ori
358. vice is available on your device you can also configure received faxes to be forwarded to an E mail address or file repository using the Fax Forward feature Secure Faxes If the administrator has switched on the Secure Receive feature all incoming faxes require a passcode in order to release them for printing 1 To release a Secure Fax for printing press the Job EEE EE Status button and select the held fax job in the list 2 Torelease a fax for printing select the Release button 3 Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode and select the Release Job button The secure fax job is released for printing 116 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Fax Receiving a Fax Fax Forward This feature enables the device to send incoming fax jobs to one or more E mail addresses a repository or a combination of both Note In order to enable the Fax Forwarding feature the device must have either Workflow Scanning or E mail enabled and Fax must be installed and enabled Fax Forward is set up by the System Administrator using Internet Services The incoming fax jobs which require forwarding are specified using their fax number An E mail address and or repository is then entered as the forwarding address for the fax jobs specified e Fax Forward to E mail the fax job is forwarded to an E mail address as an attachment Information to include in the E mail such as the subject or a message can also be enter
359. wing instructions carefully before operating the device Refer to them as needed to ensure the continued safe operation of your device Your Xerox device and supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements These include safety agency evaluation and certification and compliance with electromagnetic regulations and established environmental standards The safety and environment testing and performance of this device have been verified using Xerox materials only A WARNING Unauthorized alterations which may include the addition of new functions or connection of external devices may impact the device certification Please contact your Xerox representative for more information Safety Labels and Symbols All warnings and instructions marked on or supplied with the device should be followed This WARNING alerts users to areas of the device where there is the possibility of personal A injury This WARNING alerts users to areas of the device where there are heated surfaces which AN should not be touched 308 WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 Safety and Regulations Operational Safety Information Operational Safety Information Your Xerox device and supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements These include safety agency examination approval and compliance with established environmental standards To ensure the continued safe operation of your Xerox device follow t
360. xes during off peak hours or when sending to another country or time zone Delay Send can also be used with Mailbox and Polling options 1 Select Specified Time and select either the Hour or belay Send the Minute field to enter a time to send your fax 2 Use the arrow buttons or numeric keypad to enter the hours and minutes If the device is set up to display the time using a 12 hour clock you must also select either the AM or PM button 3 Select Save and program and scan the fax job The fax will be stored in memory and sent at the specified time WorkCentre 5735 5740 5745 5755 5765 5775 5790 99 Fax Internet Fax Internet Fax If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter log in details to access the features Refer to Log In Out on page 32 of Getting Started To select the Internet Fax service press the Services Home button Select the Internet Fax option When a service is selected on the device additional options and features are displayed Most feature screens include the following buttons to confirm or cancel your choices e Undo resets the current screen to the values that were displayed when the screen was opened e Cancel resets the screen and returns to the previous screen e Save saves the selections made and returns to the previous screen e Close closes the screen and returns to the previous screen If an option is not required use the Off optio
361. y job and the required paper size is not available e Enable allows the device to select the best match for the job when the required paper is not available plus or minus 5mm of the standard size e Disable allows the system to use the closest paper size that accommodates the entire image If this is not available the job is held by the system Paper Substitution Enables the device to automatically substitute common US and metric paper sizes when printing e Nearest Match select Enable to allow the device to automatically substitute the paper sizes shown on the screen e g if an A4 document is received for printing and only 8 5x11 paper is available the device substitutes 1 6 5 1 for A4 Select Disable to ensure the device does not substitute the sizes shown In this instance a job would be held in the job list until the correct paper size is loaded Note Substituting paper sizes may result in image loss e Reduce Size when this feature is enabled the device will substitute A3 or 11x17 for a job requesting 8 5x14 media Tray Information Timeout When Tray 1 or 2 are opened and closed the Tray Information screen is displayed asking the user to confirm the size and type of the paper loaded in the tray This feature enables the Administrator to set the length of time the Tray Information screen is displayed e Enable allows you to specify the length of time that Tray Information screen is displayed gt Timeout select th
362. your fax document select Print a Cover Sheet in the Cover Sheet tab The Cover Sheet options window will display automatically allowing you to customize the page to your requirements Refer to Cover Sheet on page 113 for more information When you have selected all the options you require select OK 7 Select the Options tab to program the following options e Confirmation Sheet is used to print a confirmation sheet Cover Sheet Options on the device containing details of the transmission 2 Confirmation Sheet Print a Confirmation Sheet e Send Speed is used to select the top transmission speed of Send Speed your fax job The actual transmission speed will also Soper G4 L eee depend on the speed capability of the receiving fax 5 Fax Resolution Fine machine Select either Super G3 33 6 Kbps G3 Sond Tame 14 4Kbps or Forced 4800 bps eee e Fax Resolution affects the appearance of the fax at the receiving fax terminal A higher resolution produces a ee eae better quality image A lower resolution reduces E communication time Select Standard Fine or Superfine C Credit Card e Send Time is used to specify when to send the fax Send Now will send the fax immediately or Send At allows you 2 to enter the time to send the fax within the next 24 hours e Fax Dialing Options are used to enter a dialing prefix to add to the fax number or a credit card number if a billing system is in use When
363. ze Originals if scanning a mix of sizes The options are e Auto Detect is the default setting and enables automatic size sensing The size detected is matched to a standard size paper e Pre set Scan Areas allows you to define the size of your original from a list of pre set standard document sizes You can view the list by using the scroll bar e Custom Scan Areas is used to enter a specific area for scanning Measure the area to be scanned on the original and enter the X and Y axis measurements into the fields provided Only the area specified is scanned e Mixed Size Originals allows you scan documents containing different size pages The pages must be the same width like A4 LEF and A3 SEF 8 5x11 LEF and 11x17 SEF other combinations are shown on the screen The device will detect the size of the documents and determine whether the receiving fax machine can support the various paper sizes If the receiving fax cannot support the page sizes the image is reduced or enlarged to fit Select Save to save your selections and exit Reduce Split Select Reduce Split to specify how your faxed document is printed if your document paper size is larger than the receiving fax machine s capabilities The options are e Reduce to Fit this option reduces the image to fit the FRR ER paper size of the receiving fax machine as Fieduce to Fit will shrink largo documents so they 10 on smaller paper STD e Split Across Pages this

User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents